HT45F4N/HT45FH4N

Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Revision: V1.10
Date: ��������������
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Table of Contents
Features............................................................................................................. 6
CPU Features.......................................................................................................................... 6
Peripheral Features.................................................................................................................. 6
General Description.......................................................................................... 7
Selection Table.................................................................................................. 8
Block Diagram................................................................................................... 8
Pin Assignment................................................................................................. 9
Pin Descriptions..............................................................................................11
Absolute Maximum Ratings........................................................................... 17
D.C. Characteristics........................................................................................ 18
A.C. Characteristics........................................................................................ 19
SCOM Electrical Characteristics................................................................... 20
LVD & LVR Electrical Characteristics........................................................... 20
A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics...................................................... 21
Over Current Circuit Electrical Characteristics........................................... 21
Over/Under Voltage Circuit Electrical Characteristics................................ 22
USB Charge/Discharge Detection Electrical Characteristics..................... 22
LDO Regulator Electrical Characteristics.................................................... 23
Level Converter Electrical Characteristics................................................... 23
Power on Reset Electrical Characteristics................................................... 23
System Architecture....................................................................................... 24
Clocking and Pipelining.......................................................................................................... 24
Program Counter.................................................................................................................... 25
Stack...................................................................................................................................... 26
Arithmetic and Logic Unit – ALU............................................................................................ 26
Flash Program Memory.................................................................................. 27
Structure................................................................................................................................. 27
Special Vectors...................................................................................................................... 27
Look-up Table......................................................................................................................... 28
Table Program Example......................................................................................................... 28
In Circuit Programming.......................................................................................................... 29
On-Chip Debug Support – OCDS.......................................................................................... 30
RAM Data Memory.......................................................................................... 31
Structure................................................................................................................................. 31
Special Function Register Description......................................................... 33
Indirect Addressing Registers – IAR0, IAR1.......................................................................... 33
Memory Pointers – MP0, MP1............................................................................................... 33
Bank Pointer – BP.................................................................................................................. 34
Rev. 1.10
2
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Accumulator – ACC................................................................................................................ 34
Program Counter Low Register – PCL................................................................................... 34
Look-up Table Registers – TBLP, TBHP, TBLH...................................................................... 34
Status Register – STATUS..................................................................................................... 35
EEPROM Data Memory................................................................................... 37
EEPROM Data Memory Structure......................................................................................... 37
EEPROM Registers............................................................................................................... 37
Reading Data from the EEPROM ......................................................................................... 39
Writing Data to the EEPROM................................................................................................. 39
Write Protection...................................................................................................................... 39
EEPROM Interrupt................................................................................................................. 39
Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 40
Oscillator......................................................................................................... 41
Oscillator Overview................................................................................................................ 41
System Clock Configurations................................................................................................. 41
Internal RC Oscillator – HIRC................................................................................................ 42
Internal 32kHz Oscillator – LIRC............................................................................................ 42
Operating Modes and System Clocks.......................................................... 42
System Clocks....................................................................................................................... 42
System Operation Modes....................................................................................................... 43
Control Register..................................................................................................................... 45
Operating Mode Switching .................................................................................................... 47
Standby Current Considerations............................................................................................ 50
Wake-up................................................................................................................................. 50
Watchdog Timer.............................................................................................. 51
Watchdog Timer Clock Source............................................................................................... 51
Watchdog Timer Control Register.......................................................................................... 51
Watchdog Timer Operation.................................................................................................... 52
Reset and Initialisation................................................................................... 53
Reset Functions..................................................................................................................... 53
Reset Initial Conditions.......................................................................................................... 56
Input/Output Ports.......................................................................................... 59
Pull-high Resistors................................................................................................................. 59
Port A Wake-up...................................................................................................................... 60
I/O Port Control Registers...................................................................................................... 61
Pin-remapping Functions....................................................................................................... 62
Pin-remapping Register......................................................................................................... 62
I/O Pin Structures................................................................................................................... 64
Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 65
Timer Modules – TM....................................................................................... 66
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 66
TM Operation......................................................................................................................... 66
TM Clock Source.................................................................................................................... 66
Rev. 1.10
3
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM Interrupts.......................................................................................................................... 67
TM External Pins.................................................................................................................... 67
TM Input/Output Pin Control Register.................................................................................... 67
Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 74
Standard Type TM – STM............................................................................... 75
Standard TM Operation.......................................................................................................... 75
Standard Type TM Register Description................................................................................ 76
Standard Type TM Operating Modes..................................................................................... 80
Compare Output Mode........................................................................................................... 80
Timer/Counter Mode.............................................................................................................. 83
PWM Output Mode................................................................................................................. 83
Single Pulse Output Mode..................................................................................................... 86
Capture Input Mode............................................................................................................... 88
Periodic Type TM – PTM................................................................................. 90
Periodic TM Operation........................................................................................................... 90
Periodic Type TM Register Description.................................................................................. 91
Periodic Type TM Operating Modes....................................................................................... 95
Compare Match Output Mode................................................................................................ 95
Timer/Counter Mode.............................................................................................................. 98
PWM Output Mode................................................................................................................. 98
Single Pulse Output Mode................................................................................................... 100
Capture Input Mode............................................................................................................. 102
Analog to Digital Converter......................................................................... 104
A/D Overview....................................................................................................................... 104
A/D Converter Register Description..................................................................................... 105
A/D Converter Data Registers – ADRL, ADRH.................................................................... 105
A/D Converter Control Registers – ADCR0, ADCR1, ACERL, ACERH............................... 105
A/D Operation.......................................................................................................................110
A/D Input Pins.......................................................................................................................111
Summary of A/D Conversion Steps.......................................................................................112
Programming Considerations................................................................................................113
A/D Transfer Function...........................................................................................................113
A/D Programming Examples.................................................................................................114
Complementary PWM Output ......................................................................116
Over Current Protection ...............................................................................118
OCP Funciton........................................................................................................................118
OCP Circuit Operation..........................................................................................................118
Input Voltage Range..............................................................................................................119
OCP Register........................................................................................................................119
Offset Calibration................................................................................................................. 127
Over Voltage Protection and Under Voltage Protection............................ 127
OUVP Register..................................................................................................................... 128
USB Charge/Discharge Auto Detection...................................................... 131
USB0.................................................................................................................................... 131
Rev. 1.10
4
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
USB1, USB2........................................................................................................................ 132
USB Charge/Discharge Auto Detection Registers............................................................... 133
Interrupts....................................................................................................... 136
Interrupt Registers................................................................................................................ 136
Interrupt Operation............................................................................................................... 143
External Interrupt.................................................................................................................. 145
UVP Interrupt....................................................................................................................... 145
OVP Interrupt....................................................................................................................... 145
OCP Interrupt....................................................................................................................... 146
Multi-function Interrupt......................................................................................................... 146
A/D Converter Interrupt........................................................................................................ 146
Time Base Interrupts............................................................................................................ 147
EEPROM Interrupt............................................................................................................... 148
LVD Interrupt........................................................................................................................ 148
TM Interrupts........................................................................................................................ 148
Interrupt Wake-up Function.................................................................................................. 148
Programming Considerations............................................................................................... 149
Low Voltage Detector – LVD........................................................................ 150
LVD Register........................................................................................................................ 150
LVD Operation...................................................................................................................... 151
SCOM Function for LCD............................................................................... 152
LCD Operation..................................................................................................................... 152
LCD Bias Control................................................................................................................. 153
Application Circuit........................................................................................ 154
Instruction Set............................................................................................... 155
Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 155
Instruction Timing................................................................................................................. 155
Moving and Transferring Data.............................................................................................. 155
Arithmetic Operations........................................................................................................... 155
Logical and Rotate Operation.............................................................................................. 156
Branches and Control Transfer............................................................................................ 156
Bit Operations...................................................................................................................... 156
Table Read Operations........................................................................................................ 156
Other Operations.................................................................................................................. 156
Instruction Set Summary............................................................................. 157
Table Conventions................................................................................................................ 157
Instruction Definition.................................................................................... 159
Package Information.................................................................................... 168
28-pin SSOP (150 mil) Outline Dimensions......................................................................... 169
Rev. 1.10
5
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Features
CPU Features
• Operating Voltage
♦♦
fSYS = 7.5MHz: 2.55V~5.50V
♦♦
fSYS = 15MHz: 4.50V~5.50V
• Up to 0.27μs instruction cycle with 15MHz system clock at VDD=5V
• Power down and wake-up functions to reduce power consumption
• Oscillators
♦♦
Internal RC -- HIRC
♦♦
Internal 32kHz -- LIRC
• Multi-mode operation: NORMAL, SLOW, IDLE and SLEEP
• All instructions executed in one or two instruction cycles
• Table read instructions
• 63 powerful instructions
• 8-level subroutine nesting
• Bit manipulation instruction
Peripheral Features
• Flash Program Memory: 4K×16
• RAM Data Memory: 192×8
• EEPROM Memory: 64×8
• Watchdog Timer function
• Up to 26 bidirectional I/O lines
• Software controlled 4-SCOM lines LCD driver with 1/2 bias
• Three pin-shared external interrupts
• One 16-bit STM
• Three 10-bit PTMs
• Two complementary PWM output with dead time control
• Two over current protection (OCP) with interrupt
• One Over/Under voltage protection (OUVP) with interrupt
• USB charge/discharge auto detection function
• Dual Time-Base functions for generation of fixed time interrupt signals
• 14-channel 12-bit resolution A/D converter (external input)
• Low voltage reset function
• Low voltage detect function
• One integrated LDO: 5V output − HT45FH4N only
• 2 level shift output pins − HT45FH4N only
• Package: 28-pin SSOP
Rev. 1.10
6
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Features
Device
HT45F4N
HT45FH4N
AX/BX pin at Reset
—
CX/DX pin at Reset
—
Output low
Internally Connected
—
PB4/OUT0L→A, PB3/OUT0H→C
Level Shift
—
AX/BX is non-inversion output of input A
CX/DX is inversion output of input C
Output high
Peripheral Features Table
General Description
The device is a Flash Memory type 8-bit high performance RISC architecture microcontroller.
Offering users the convenience of Flash Memory multi-programming features, this device also
includes a wide range of functions and features. Other memory includes an area of RAM Data
Memory as well as an area of EEPROM memory for storage of non-volatile data such as serial
numbers, calibration data etc.
Analog features include a multi-channel 12-bit A/D converter, two over current protection functions,
an over/under voltage protection function, an USB charge/discharge auto detection function and a
LDO regulator. Multiple and extremely flexible Timer Modules provide timing, pulse generation and
PWM generation functions. Protective features such as an internal Watchdog Timer, Low Voltage
Reset and Low Voltage Detector coupled with excellent noise immunity and ESD protection ensure
that reliable operation is maintained in hostile electrical environments.
A full choice of HIRC and LIRC oscillator functions are provided including a fully integrated
system oscillator which requires no external components for its implementation. The ability to
operate and switch dynamically between a range of operating modes using different clock sources
gives users the ability to optimise microcontroller operation and minimize power consumption.
This device contains USB ports which are used to implement the Charge/Discharge Detection
function. Also the inclusion of flexible I/O programming features, Time-Base functions along
with many other features ensure that the device will find excellent use in USB charge/discharge
applications.
Rev. 1.10
7
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Selection Table
Most features are common to all devices and the main features distinguishing them are the I/O pin
count and Level Shift output pins. The following table summarises the main features of each device.
Part No.
VDD
Program
Data
Data
Ext.
I/O
Memory Memory EEPROM
Interrupt
HT45F4N
2.55V~
5.5V
4K×16
192×8
64×8
26
HT45FH4N
2.55V~
5.5V
4K×16
192×8
64×8
21
A/D
Timer
Stacks USB LDO
Module
3
12bit×14
16-bit
STM×1
10-bit
PTM×3
8
3
—
3
12bit×14
16-bit
STM×1
10-bit
PTM×3
8
3
√
Level
Shift
Output
Pins
Package
—
28SSOP
AX/BX
CX/DX
28SSOP
Block Diagram
Reset
Circuit
Watchdog
Timer
Flash/EEPROM
Programming Circuitry
EEPROM
Data
Memory
Flash
Program
Memory
Low
Voltage
Detect
RAM
Data
Memory
Low
Voltage
Reset
Time
Base
8-bit
RISC
MCU
Core
Interrupt
Controller
Internal RC
Oscillators
12-bit A/D
Converter
Over Current
Protection
LDO
Level
Shift
I/O
Timer
Modules
Over/Under
Voltage Protection
USB
Charge/Discharge
Auto Detection
For HT45FH4N only
Rev. 1.10
8
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Assignment
     
              
         Rev. 1.10
9
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU


                  


                  
Note: 1. Bracketed pin names indicate non-default pinout remapping locations.
2. If the pin-shared pin functions have multiple outputs simultaneously, its pin names at the right side of the
“/” sign can be used for higher priority.
3. Both actual MCU and OCDS EV devices have the same package type. The OCDSCK and OCDSDA pins
are only available for the OCDS EV device. More details are described in the OCDS section.
4. For HT45FH4N device
♦♦ The I/O lines, PB4/OUT0L and PB3/OUT0H, are internally connected to the level shift inputs, A and C
respectively.
♦♦
The I/O lines, PB1/[OUT0L]/OUT1L, PB2/[OUT0H]/OUT1H and PD1/AN9/D0- are not connected to
the external pins.
♦♦
The pin 25 and pin 26 must be connected together in the application PCB.
Rev. 1.10
10
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Descriptions
With the exception of the power pins and some relevant transformer control pins, all pins on these
devices can be referenced by their Port name, e.g. PA0, PA1 etc, which refer to the digital I/O
function of the pins. However these Port pins are also shared with other function such as the Analog
to Digital Converter, Timer Module pins etc. The function of each pin is listed in the following table,
however the details behind how each pin is configured is contained in other sections of the datasheet.
HT45F4N
Pin Name
PA0/TP3_1/AN0
PA1/DAPWR/AN1/
VREF
PA2/[INT0]/TCK2/
AN2
PA3/[INT1]/TCK1/
SCOM2
PA4/[INT2]/TP0_1/
[OUT1H]/SCOM1
PA5/INT0/TCK0/
SCOM3
Rev. 1.10
Function
OPT
PA0
PAPU
PAWU
I/T
O/T
ST
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
CMOS
wake-up.
Description
TP3_1
TMPC1
ST
CMOS TM3 I/O
AN0
ADCR0
ACERL
AN
—
PA1
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
DAPWR
—
AN
—
D/A Converter power input
AN1
ADCR0
ACERL
AN
—
ADC input
VREF
ADCR1
AN
—
A/D Converter reference voltage input
PA2
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
INT0
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
External interrupt 0
TCK2
—
ST
—
TM2 clock input
AN2
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
—
ADC input
PA3
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
INT1
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
External interrupt 1
—
TM1 clock input
ADC input
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
TCK1
—
ST
SCOM2
SCOMC
—
SCOM Software controlled LCD COM
PA4
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
INT2
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
TP0_1
TMPC0
ST
CMOS TM0 I/O
OUT1H
PRM
TMPC1
—
CMOS Complementary PWM1 output
SCOM1
SCOMC
—
SCOM Software controlled LCD COM
PA5
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
INT0
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
External interrupt 0
TCK0
—
ST
—
TM0 clock input
SCOM3
SCOMC
—
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
External interrupt 2
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
SCOM Software controlled LCD COM
11
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Name
PA6/INT1/TCK3/
TP2_1/AN3/
ICPDA/OCDSDA
PA7/INT2/TP1_1/
AN4/ICPCK/
OCDSCK
PB0/TP0_0/TP1_0/
TP2_0/TP3_0/
[OUT1L]/SCOM0
PB1/[OUT0L]/
OUT1L
PB2/[OUT0H]/
OUT1H
PB3/OUT0H
PB4/OUT0L
PC0/OUVP00/AN5
Function
OPT
PA6
PAPU
PAWU
ST
INT1
INTEG
INTC1
ST
O/T
Description
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
CMOS
wake-up.
—
External interrupt 1
—
TM3 clock input
TCK3
—
ST
TP2_1
TMPC1
ST
AN3
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
ICPDA
—
ST
CMOS In-circuit programming data/address pin
OCDSDA
—
ST
CMOS
On-chip debug support data/address pin, for EV chip
only.
PA7
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
INT2
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
TP1_1
TMPC0
ST
AN4
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
—
ADC input
ICPCK
—
ST
—
In-circuit programming clock pin
OCDSCK
—
ST
—
On-chip debug support clock pin, for EV chip only.
PB0
PBPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
TP0_0
TMPC0
ST
CMOS TM0 I/O
TP1_0
TMPC0
ST
CMOS TM1 I/O
TP2_0
TMPC1
ST
CMOS TM2 I/O
TP3_0
TMPC1
ST
CMOS TM3 I/O
OUT1L
PRM
TMPC1
—
CMOS Complementary PWM 1 output
SCOM0
SCOMC
—
SCOM Software controlled LCD COM
PB1
PBPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
OUT0L
PRM
TMPC0
—
CMOS Complementary PWM0 output
OUT1L
PRM
TMPC1
—
CMOS Complementary PWM1 output
PB2
PBPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
OUT0H
PRM
TMPC0
—
CMOS Complementary PWM0 output
OUT1H
PRM
TMPC1
—
CMOS Complementary PWM 1 output
PB3
PBPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
OUT0H
PRM
TMPC0
—
CMOS Complementary PWM0 output
PB4
PBPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
OUT0L
PRM
TMPC0
—
CMOS Complementary PWM0 output
PC0
PCPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
ACERL
OUVP00
OUVPC0
AN5
Rev. 1.10
I/T
ACERL
ADCR0
CMOS TM2 I/O
—
ADC input
External interrupt 2
CMOS TM1 I/O
AN
—
Over/under voltage protection input
AN
—
ADC input
12
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Name
PC1/OUVP01/AN6
PC2/OUVP02/AN7
PC3/OCP00
PC4/OCP01
PC5/OCP10
PC6/OCP11
PD0/AN8/D0+
PD1/AN9/D0-
PD2/AN10/D1+
PD3/AN11/D1-
PD4/AN12/D2+
PD5/AN13/D2-
VDD/AVDD/IOVDD
Rev. 1.10
Function
OPT
I/T
PC1
PCPU
ST
OUVP01
ACERL
OUVPC0
AN
—
Over/under voltage protection input
AN6
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
—
ADC input
PC2
PCPU
ST
OUVP02
ACERL
OUVPC0
AN
—
Over/under voltage protection input
AN7
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
—
ADC input
PC3
PCPU
ST
OCP00
OCPPC
OCP0C0
AN
PC4
PCPU
ST
OCP01
OCPPC
OCP0C0
AN
PC5
PCPU
ST
OCP10
OCPPC
OCP1C0
AN
PC6
PCPU
ST
OCP11
OCPPC
OCP1C0
AN
PD0
PDPU
ST
AN8
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
D0+
ADUC1
—
PD1
PDPU
ST
AN9
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
D0-
—
AN
PD2
PDPU
ST
AN10
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
D1+
ADUC1
—
PD3
PDPU
ST
AN11
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
D1-
ADUC1
—
PD4
PDPU
ST
AN12
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
O/T
Description
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
Over current protection 0 input
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
Over current protection 0 input
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
Over current protection 1 input
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
Over current protection 1 input
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
ADC input
AN
USB D0+ 0.6V output pin
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
ADC input
—
USB power mode detection input
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
ADC input
AN
USB D1+ DAC output pin
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
ADC input
AN
USB D1- DAC output pin
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
ADC input
AN
USB D2+ DAC output pin
D2+
ADUC1
—
PD5
PDPU
ST
AN13
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
—
ADC input
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
D2-
ADUC1
—
AN
USB D2- DAC output pin
VDD
—
PWR
—
Digital positive power supply
AVDD
—
PWR
—
ADC positive power supply
IOVDD
—
PWR
—
I/O port positive power supply
13
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Name
Function
OPT
I/T
O/T
VSS
—
PWR
—
Digital negitive power supply
VSS/AVSS/IOVSS
Description
AVSS
—
PWR
—
ADC negitive power supply
IOVSS
—
PWR
—
I/O port negitive power supply
Function
OPT
I/T
O/T
PA0
PAPU
PAWU
ST
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
CMOS
wake-up.
TP3_1
TMPC1
ST
CMOS TM3 I/O
AN0
ADCR0
ACERL
AN
—
PA1
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
DAPWR
—
AN
—
D/A Converter power input
AN1
ADCR0
ACERL
AN
—
ADC input
VREF
ADCR1
AN
—
A/D Converter reference voltage input
PA2
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
INT0
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
External interrupt 0
TCK2
—
ST
—
TM2 clock input
AN2
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
—
ADC input
PA3
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
INT1
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
External interrupt 1
—
TM1 clock input
HT45FH4N
Pin Name
PA0/TP3_1/AN0
PA1/DAPWR/AN1/
VREF
PA2/[INT0]/TCK2/
AN2
PA3/[INT1]/TCK1/
SCOM2
PA4/[INT2]/TP0_1/
[OUT1H]/SCOM1
PA5/INT0/TCK0/
SCOM3
Rev. 1.10
Description
ADC input
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
TCK1
—
ST
SCOM2
SCOMC
—
SCOM Software controlled LCD COM
PA4
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
INT2
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
TP0_1
TMPC0
ST
CMOS TM0 I/O
OUT1H
PRM
TMPC1
—
CMOS Complementary PWM1 output
SCOM1
SCOMC
—
SCOM Software controlled LCD COM
PA5
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
INT0
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
External interrupt 0
TCK0
—
ST
—
TM0 clock input
SCOM3
SCOMC
—
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
External interrupt 2
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
SCOM Software controlled LCD COM
14
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Name
PA6/INT1/TCK3/
TP2_1/AN3/
ICPDA/
OCDSDA
PA7/INT2/TP1_1/
AN4/ICPCK/
OCDSCK
PB0/TP0_0/TP1_0/
TP2_0/TP3_0/
[OUT1L]/SCOM0
PC0/OUVP00/AN5
PC1/OUVP01/AN6
PC2/OUVP02/AN7
Function
OPT
PA6
PAPU
PAWU
ST
INT1
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
External interrupt 1
TCK3
ACERL
AN
—
ADC input
TP2_1
TMPC1
ST
AN3
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
ICPDA
—
ST
CMOS In-circuit programming data/address pin
OCDSDA
—
ST
CMOS
On-chip debug support data/address pin, for EV chip
only.
PA7
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
wake-up.
INT2
INTEG
INTC1
ST
—
TP1_1
TMPC0
ST
AN4
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
PC4/OCP01
Rev. 1.10
O/T
Description
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up and
CMOS
wake-up.
CMOS TM2 I/O
—
ADC input
External interrupt 2
CMOS TM1 I/O
—
ADC input
ICPCK
—
ST
—
In-circuit programming clock pin
OCDSCK
—
ST
—
On-chip debug support clock pin, for EV chip only.
PB0
PBPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
TP0_0
TMPC0
ST
CMOS TM0 I/O
TP1_0
TMPC0
ST
CMOS TM1 I/O
TP2_0
TMPC1
ST
CMOS TM2 I/O
TP3_0
TMPC1
ST
CMOS TM3 I/O
OUT1L
PRM
TMPC1
—
CMOS Complementary PWM 1 output
SCOM0
SCOMC
—
SCOM Software controlled LCD COM
PC0
PCPU
ST
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
ACERL
OUVP00
OUVPC0
AN
—
Over/under voltage protection input
—
ADC input
AN5
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
PC1
PCPU
ST
OUVP01
ACERL
OUVPC0
AN
—
Over/under voltage protection input
AN6
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
—
ADC input
PC2
PCPU
ST
ACERL
OUVP02
OUVPC0
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
AN
—
Over/under voltage protection input
ACERL
ADCR0
AN
—
ADC input
PC3
PCPU
ST
OCP00
OCPPC
OCP0C0
AN
PC4
PCPU
ST
OCP01
OCPPC
OCP0C0
AN
AN7
PC3/OCP00
I/T
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
Over current protection 0 input
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
15
Over current protection 0 input
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Name
PC5/OCP10
PC6/OCP11
PD0/AN8/D0+
PD2/AN10/D1+
PD3/AN11/D1-
PD4/AN12/D2+
PD5/AN13/D2-
Function
OPT
I/T
PC5
PCPU
ST
OCP10
OCPPC
OCP1C0
AN
PC6
PCPU
ST
OCP11
OCPPC
OCP1C0
AN
PD0
PDPU
ST
AN8
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
D0+
ADUC1
—
PD2
PDPU
ST
AN10
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
D1+
ADUC1
—
PD3
PDPU
ST
AN11
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
D1-
ADUC1
—
PD4
PDPU
ST
AN12
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
O/T
Description
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
Over current protection 1 input
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
Over current protection 1 input
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
ADC input
AN
USB D0+ 0.6V output pin
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
ADC input
AN
USB D1+ DAC output pin
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
ADC input
AN
USB D1- DAC output pin
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
—
ADC input
AN
USB D2+ DAC output pin
D2+
ADUC1
—
PD5
PDPU
ST
AN13
ACERH
ADCR0
AN
—
ADC input
D2-
ADUC1
—
AN
USB D2- DAC output pin
CMOS General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up.
VDD
—
PWR
—
Digital positive power supply
AVDD
—
PWR
—
ADC positive power supply
IOVDD
—
PWR
—
I/O port positive power supply
VSS
—
PWR
—
Digital negitive power supply
AVSS
—
PWR
—
ADC negitive power supply
IOVSS
—
PWR
—
I/O port negitive power supply
AX, BX
AX, BX
—
—
—
Level shift outputs of input A.
CX, DX
CX, DX
—
—
—
Level shift outputs of input C.
VDD/AVDD/IOVDD
VSS/AVSS/IOVSS
Rev. 1.10
16
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Internal Connection Description
Signal Name
Function
OPT
I/T
O/T
PB3 ~ PB4
General purpose input/output. Register enabled
pull-up.
Internally connected to the level shift inputs
respectively.
PBPU
ST CMOS
OUT0L, OUT0H
PWM output
Internally connected to the level shift inputs A and C
TMPC
—
A, C
Level shift inputs.
Internally connected to PB4/OUT0L and PB3/
OUT0H respectively
—
—
Pin-shared Mapping
—
CMOS PB4, PB3
—
—
Note: I/T: Input type;
O/T: Output type
OPT: Optional by configuration option (CO) or register option
PWR: Power;
ST: Schmitt Trigger input
CMOS: CMOS output;
AN: Analog input pin
SCOM: Software controlled LCD COM
Level Shift Input/Output Relationship and Reset Condition
Level Shift Output
AX, BX
Level Shift Output
CX, DX
Level Shift Input
A input = Low
A input = High
Low
High
Level Shift Input
C input = Low
C input = High
High
Low
Reset State
High
Reset State
Low
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Supply Voltage.................................................................................................VSS−0.3V to VSS+6.0V
Input Voltage...................................................................................................VSS−0.3V to VDD+0.3V
Storage Temperature.....................................................................................................-50˚C to 150˚C
Operating Temperature...................................................................................................-40˚C to 85˚C
IOL Total.................................................................................................................................... 120mA
IOH Total...................................................................................................................................-120mA
Total Power Dissipation.......................................................................................................... 500mW
Note: These are stress ratings only. Stresses exceeding the range specified under "Absolute Maximum
Ratings" may cause substantial damage to these devices. Functional operation of these devices at
other conditions beyond those listed in the specification is not implied and prolonged exposure to
extreme conditions may affect devices reliability.
Rev. 1.10
17
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
D.C. Characteristics
Ta = 25°C
Symbol
VDD
IDD
ISTB
Parameter
Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
fSYS = fHIRC/4 = 7.5MHz
2.55
—
5.5
fSYS = fHIRC/2 = 15MHz
4.5
—
5.5
2.55
—
5.5
VDD
Conditions
Operating Voltage
(HIRC)
─
Operating Voltage
(LIRC)
─
fSYS = fLIRC = 32kHz
3V
fSYS =7.5MHz,
No load, All peripherals off
—
2.4
3.6
—
5.4
8.1
fSYS=15MHz,
No load, All peripherals off
—
5.0
7.5
—
6.0
9.0
fSYS=32kHz,
No load, All peripherals off
—
45
65
—
60
90
No load,
All peripherals off
—
1.9
3.0
—
3.1
5.0
—
1.0
1.5
—
1.6
2.4
—
1.8
2.7
—
1.8
3.0
—
2.8
5.0
—
3.5
—
VDD
Operating Current
(HIRC)
5V
4.5V
5V
Operating Current
(LIRC)
3V
Standby Current
(IDLE0 Mode)
3V
Standby Current
(IDLE1 Mode)
5V
5V
3V
4.5V
5V
fHIRC =30MHz,
No load, All peripherals off
Unit
V
mA
mA
μA
μA
mA
Standby Current
(SLEEP Mode)
3V
VIH
Input High Voltage
(I/O Ports)
5V
—
—
0.8VDD
—
VDD
V
VIL
Input Low Voltage
(I/O Ports)
5V
—
0
—
1.5
V
0
—
0.2VDD
V
Output High Voltage
(PA, PB0, PC, PD)
3V
IOH=-2.4mA
2.7
—
—
5V
IOH=-6mA
4.5
—
—
Output High Voltage
(PB1~PB4)
3V
IOH=-16mA
2.7
—
—
5V
IOH=-40mA
4.5
—
—
VOH
VOL
IOH
IOL
ILEAK
5V
No load,
All peripherals off
—
—
Output Low Voltage
(PA, PB0, PC, PD)
3V
IOL=6.4mA
—
—
0.3
5V
IOL=16mA
—
—
0.5
Output Low Voltage
(PB1~PB4)
3V
IOL=16mA
—
—
0.3
5V
IOL=40mA
—
—
0.5
I/O Port Source Current
(PA, PB0, PC, PD)
-2.4
-4.8
—
5V
-6
-12
—
I/O Port Source Current
(PB1~PB4)
-16
-32
—
5V
-40
-80
—
I/O Port Sink Current
(PA, PB0, PC, PD)
6.4
12.8
—
5V
16
32
—
I/O Port Sink Current
(PB1~PB4)
16
32
—
5V
40
80
—
Input Leakage current
5V
3V
3V
3V
3V
VOH = 0.9VDD
VOH = 0.9VDD
VOL = 0.1VDD
VOL = 0.1VDD
VIN=VDD or VIN=VSS
3V
—
μA
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
—
—
±1
μA
20
60
100
KΩ
RPH
Pull-high Resistance of I/O Ports
5V
—
10
30
50
KΩ
VDR
RAM Data Retention Voltage
—
—
1.0
—
—
V
IDDP
Supply Current During
Programming
—
—
—
—
10
mA
Rev. 1.10
18
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
A.C. Characteristics
Ta = 25°C
Symbol
fSYS
Parameter
System Clock
Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
2.55V~5.5V fSYS = fHIRC/4
—
—
7.5
4.5V~5.5V fSYS = fHIRC/2
—
—
15
—
VDD
Condition
2.55V~5.5V fSYS = fLIRC
—
32
Typ.2%
30
Typ.+
2%
4.0V~5.5V Ta = -10°C to 85°C
Typ.5%
30
Typ.+
5%
3.6V~5.5V Ta = -40°C to 85°C
Typ.10%
30
Typ.+
10%
5V
fHIRC
fLIRC
High speed Internal RC
oscillator (HIRC)
Low speed Internal RC
oscillator (LIRC)
Ta = 25°C
5V
Ta = 25°C
Typ.10%
32
Typ.+
10%
5V
Ta = -40°C to 85°C
Typ.30%
32
Typ.+
30%
2.55V~5.5V Ta = -40°C to 85°C
Typ.50%
32
Typ.+
60%
Unit
MHz
kHz
MHz
kHz
tINT
External Interrupt Minimum
Pulse Width
—
—
10
—
—
μs
tTCK
TM TCK Input Pin
Minimum Pulse Width
—
—
0.3
—
—
μs
tRSTD
System Reset Delay Time
(WDT Time-out Hardware
Cold Reset )
—
—
8.3
16.7
33.3
ms
—
Wake-up from SLEEP mode
or IDLE0 mode
16
—
—
1/fSYS
—
Wake-up from IDLE1 mode
2
—
—
1/fSYS
System Start-up Timer
Period (fSYS = fLIRC)
—
Wake-up from IDLE mode or
SLEEP mode
2
—
—
1/fSYS
tSRESET
Minimum Software Reset
Width to Reset
—
—
45
90
120
μs
tEERD
EEPROM Read Time
—
—
—
—
4
tSYS
tEEWR
EEPROM Write Time
—
—
—
2
4
ms
tSST
System Start-up Timer
Period (fSYS = fHIRC/4)
Note: To maintain the accuracy of the internal HIRC oscillator frequency, a 0.1μF decoupling capacitor should be
connected between VDD and VSS and located as close to the device as possible.
Rev. 1.10
19
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
SCOM Electrical Characteristics
Ta = 25°C
Symbol
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
3V
5V
3V
IBIAS
VDD/2 Bias Current for LCD
5V
3V
5V
3V
5V
VSCOM
VDD/2 Voltage for LCD COM
Port
Conditions
ISEL[1:0]=00
ISEL[1:0]=01
ISEL[1:0]=10
ISEL[1:0]=11
2.55V~
No load
5.5V
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
10.5
15.0
19.5
μA
17.5
25.0
32.5
μA
μA
21
30
39
35
50
65
μA
42
60
78
μA
70
100
130
μA
84
120
156
μA
140
200
260
μA
0.475VDD 0.5VDD 0.525VDD
V
LVD & LVR Electrical Characteristics
Ta = 25°C
Symbol
VLVR
VLVD
Parameter
Low Voltage Reset Voltage
Low Voltage Detection
Voltage
Test Conditions
VDD
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Typ.5%
2.55
Typ.+
5%
V
Typ.+
5%
V
—
LVR Enable
—
LVD Enable,
selected voltage = 2.7V
2.7
—
LVD Enable,
selected voltage = 3.0V
3.0
—
LVD Enable,
selected voltage = 3.3V
—
LVD Enable,
selected voltage = 3.6V
3.6
—
LVD Enable,
selected voltage = 4.0V
4.0
Typ.5%
3.3
VBG
Bandgap Reference Voltage
—
—
Typ.3%
1.25
Typ.+
3%
V
IBG
Additional Current for
Bandgap Reference
—
—
—
200
300
μA
ILVD
Additional Current for LVD
Enable
5V
tBGS
VBG Turn on Stable Time
—
tLVR
Minimum Low Voltage Width
to Reset
—
tLVD
Minimum Low Voltage Width
to Interrupt
—
tLVDS
LVDO Stable Time
5V
Rev. 1.10
3V
—
30
45
—
60
90
—
—
200
μs
—
120
240
480
μs
—
60
120
240
μs
—
—
15
μs
—
No load
Bandgap is Ready,
LVD off → on
20
μA
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics
Ta = 25°C
Symbol
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
VDD
A/D Converter Operating Voltage
—
—
2.7
—
5.5
V
VADI
A/D Converter Input Voltage
—
—
0
—
VREF
V
VREF
A/D Converter Reference Voltage
—
—
2
—
VDD
V
IADC
Additional Current for A/D
Converter Enable
3V
—
0.90
1.35
—
1.20
1.80
5V
No load
mA
DNL
Differential Non-linearity
5V
VREF = VDD, tADCK = 0.5μs
—
±1
±3
LSB
INL
Integral Non-linearity
5V
VREF = VDD, tADCK = 0.5μs
—
±2
±4
LSB
tADCK
A/D Converter Clock Period
—
—
0.5
—
10
μs
tADC
A/D Converter Conversion Time
(A/D Sample and Hold Time)
—
—
—
16
—
tADCK
tADS
A/D Converter Sampling Time
—
—
—
4
—
tADCK
tON2ST
A/D Converter On-to-Start Time
—
—
4
—
—
μs
Over Current Circuit Electrical Characteristics
Ta = 25°C
Symbol
IOCP
VOS_CMP
Parameter
Operating Current
Comparator Input Offset Voltage
Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
—
300
500
—
450
600
Without calibration,
CnOF[4:0] =10000B
-15
—
15
mV
With calibration
-4
—
4
mV
—
20
40
60
mV
VSS
—
VDD1.4
V
Without calibration,
AnOF[5:0]=100000B
-15
—
15
mV
With calibration
-4
—
4
mV
-0.4
—
VDD1.4
V
VDD
3V
5V
5V
VHYS
Hysteresis
VCM_CMP
Comparator Common Mode
Voltage Range
5V
VOS_OPA
OPA Input Offset Voltage
5V
Condition
OCPnM[1:0]= 01B or 10B
D/A Converter reference
voltage=2.5V
5V
—
Unit
μA
VCM_OPA
OPA Common Mode Voltage
Range
5V
DNL
Differential Nonlinearity
5V
D/A Converter reference
voltage=VDD
—
—
±1
LSB
INL
Integral Nonlinearity
5V
D/A Converter reference
voltage=VDD
—
—
±2
LSB
Rev. 1.10
—
21
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Over/Under Voltage Circuit Electrical Characteristics
Ta = 25°C
Symbol
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
3V
IOVP
Operating Current
IUVP
Operating Current
VOS
Input Offset Voltage
5V
VHYS
Hysteresis
5V
5V
3V
5V
Condition
OVPEN=1
Min.
Typ.
Max.
—
300
500
—
450
600
Unit
μA
—
300
500
—
450
600
—
-10
—
10
mV
—
20
40
60
mV
VSS
—
VDD1.4
V
UVPEN=1
—
μA
VCM
Common Mode Voltage Range
5V
DNL
Differential Nonlinearity
5V
D/A Converter reference
voltage=VDD
—
—
±1
LSB
INL
Integral Nonlinearity
5V
D/A Converter reference
voltage=VDD
—
—
±2
LSB
USB Charge/Discharge Detection Electrical Characteristics
Ta = 25°C
Symbol
VDD
Parameter
Operating Voltage
Test Conditions
VDD
Conditions
—
—
D0+ output source current at
250μA
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
2.55
—
5.5
V
0.5
0.6
0.7
V
VDP_SRC
D0+ Output Voltage
—
VDACO
D1+, D1-, D2+, D2- Output
Voltage Range
—
—
VSS
—
VREF
V
VREF
DAC0, DAC1 Reference
Voltage
—
—
2.0
—
VDD
V
IDAC
Additional Current for DAC
Enable
3V
No load
—
0.6
0.9
mA
5V
No load
—
1.0
1.5
mA
—
—
±1
LSB
—
—
±2
LSB
DNL
Differential Nonlinearity
5V
D/A Converter reference
voltage=VDD
INL
Integral Nonlinearity
5V
D/A Converter reference
voltage=VDD
RO
DAC0, DAC1 R2R Output
Resistance
5V
—
—
5
—
KΩ
Analog Switch on Resistance
between D1+ and D1-
5V
D1+ pin input 0.8V, D1- output
current 1mA
—
125
200
Ω
Analog Switch on Resistance
between D2+ and D2-
5V
D2+ pin input 0.8V, D2- output
current 1mA
—
125
200
Ω
Pull-low Resistance for D0+,
D0-, D1+, D1-, D2+. D2-
5V
—
400
700
1400
KΩ
5V
DAC reference = VDD,
DAC digital value = 148,
D1+, D1-, D2+ or D2- connect
150kΩ to ground
2.57
2.7
2.84
V
5V
DAC reference = VDD,
DAC digital value = 110,
D1+, D1-, D2+ or D2- connect
150kΩ to ground
1.9
2.0
2.1
V
—
VBG is off
—
—
200
μs
—
VBG is on
—
—
10
μs
RON
RPL
ERR
tDP_SRC
Rev. 1.10
The Error for D1+, D1-, D2+,
D2- Output Voltage
VDP_SRC Turn on Stable Time
22
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
LDO Regulator Electrical Characteristics
CLOAD=1μF, Ta = 25°C
Symbol
VIN
VOUT
Parameter
Input Voltage
Test Conditions
VDD
Condition
—
Typ.
6
Max.
Unit
—
28
V
—
Ta = 25°C,
ILOAD = 1mA, VIN = VOUT + 1V
Typ.2%
5
Typ.+
2%
V
—
-40°C ≤ Ta < 85°C,
ILOAD = 1mA, VIN = VOUT + 1V
Typ.5%
5
Typ.+
5%
V
Output Voltage
—
Min.
ΔVLOAD
Load Regulation (Note 1)
—
1mA ≤ ILOAD ≤ 30mA
VIN = VOUT + 1V
—
0.09
0.18
%/mA
VDROP
Dropout Voltage (Note 2)
—
ΔVOUT = 2%, ILOAD = 1mA
VIN = VOUT + 2V
—
—
100
mV
IQ
Quiescent Current
—
No load, VIN = 12V
—
2
4
μA
ΔVLINE
Line Regulation
—
6V ≤ VIN ≤ 28V, ILOAD = 1mA
—
—
0.2
%/V
TC
Temperature Coefficient
—
-40°C ≤ Ta < 85°C,
VIN = VOUT + 1V, ILOAD = 10mA
—
±0.9
±2
mV/°C
Note: 1. Load regulation is measured at a constant junction temperature, using pulse testing with a low ON time
and is guaranteed up to the maximum power dissipation. Power dissipation is determined by the input/
output differential voltage and the output current. Guaranteed maximum power dissipation will not be
available over the full input/output range. The maximum allowable power dissipation at any ambient
temperature is PD=(TJ(MAX)-Ta)/θJA
2. Dropout voltage is defined as the input voltage minus the output voltage that produces a 2% change in the
output voltage from the value at VIN=VOUT+2V.
Level Converter Electrical Characteristics
Ta = 25°C
Symbol
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
ISOURCE
Output Source Current of
AX, BX, CX, DX
—
VCC=12V, VOH=10.4V
-60
-90
—
mA
ISINK
Output Sink Current of
AX, BX, CX, DX
—
VCC=12V, VOL=1.6V
60
90
—
mA
Power on Reset Electrical Characteristics
Ta = 25°C
Symbol
Parameter
Test Conditions
VDD
Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
VPOR
VDD Start Voltage to Ensure Power-on
Reset
—
—
—
—
100
mV
RRPOR
VDD Rising Rate to Ensure Power-on
Reset
—
—
0.035
—
—
V/ms
tPOR
Minimum Time for VDD Stays at VPOR
to Ensure Power-on Reset
—
—
1
—
—
ms
Rev. 1.10
23
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
System Architecture
A key factor in the high-performance features of the Holtek range of microcontrollers is attributed
to their internal system architecture. The device takes advantage of the usual features found within
RISC microcontrollers providing increased speed of operation and Periodic performance. The
pipelining scheme is implemented in such a way that instruction fetching and instruction execution are
overlapped, hence instructions are effectively executed in one cycle, with the exception of branch or
call instructions. An 8-bit wide ALU is used in practically all instruction set operations, which carries
out arithmetic operations, logic operations, rotation, increment, decrement, branch decisions, etc.
The internal data path is simplified by moving data through the Accumulator and the ALU. Certain
internal registers are implemented in the Data Memory and can be directly or indirectly addressed.
The simple addressing methods of these registers along with additional architectural features ensure
that a minimum of external components is required to provide a functional I/O and A/D control
system with maximum reliability and flexibility. This makes the device suitable for low-cost,
high-volume production for controller applications.
Clocking and Pipelining
The main system clock, derived from either an HIRC or LIRC oscillator is subdivided into four
internally generated non-overlapping clocks, T1~T4. The Program Counter is incremented at the
beginning of the T1 clock during which time a new instruction is fetched. The remaining T2~T4
clocks carry out the decoding and execution functions. In this way, one T1~T4 clock cycle forms
one instruction cycle. Although the fetching and execution of instructions takes place in consecutive
instruction cycles, the pipelining structure of the microcontroller ensures that instructions are
effectively executed in one instruction cycle. The exception to this are instructions where the
contents of the Program Counter are changed, such as subroutine calls or jumps, in which case the
instruction will take one more instruction cycle to execute.


   
   
System Clock and Pipelining
Rev. 1.10
24
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
For instructions involving branches, such as jump or call instructions, two machine cycles are
required to complete instruction execution. An extra cycle is required as the program takes one
cycle to first obtain the actual jump or call address and then another cycle to actually execute the
branch. The requirement for this extra cycle should be taken into account by programmers in timing
sensitive applications.
  
    
 Instruction Fetching
Program Counter
During program execution, the Program Counter is used to keep track of the address of the
next instruction to be executed. It is automatically incremented by one each time an instruction
is executed except for instructions, such as “JMP” or “CALL” that demand a jump to a nonconsecutive Program Memory address. Only the lower 8 bits, known as the Program Counter Low
Register, are directly addressable by the application program.
When executing instructions requiring jumps to non-consecutive addresses such as a jump
instruction, a subroutine call, interrupt or reset, etc., the microcontroller manages program control
by loading the required address into the Program Counter. For conditional skip instructions, once
the condition has been met, the next instruction, which has already been fetched during the present
instruction execution, is discarded and a dummy cycle takes its place while the correct instruction is
obtained.
Program Counter
Program Counter High byte
PCL Register
PC11~PC8
PCL7~PCL0
The lower byte of the Program Counter, known as the Program Counter Low register or PCL, is
available for program control and is a readable and writeable register. By transferring data directly
into this register, a short program jump can be executed directly, however, as only this low byte
is available for manipulation, the jumps are limited to the present page of memory, that is 256
locations. When such program jumps are executed it should also be noted that a dummy cycle
will be inserted. Manipulating the PCL register may cause program branching, so an extra cycle is
needed to pre-fetch.
Rev. 1.10
25
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Stack
This is a special part of the memory which is used to save the contents of the Program Counter
only. The stack is neither part of the data nor part of the program space, and is neither readable nor
writeable. The activated level is indexed by the Stack Pointer, and is neither readable nor writeable.
At a subroutine call or interrupt acknowledge signal, the contents of the Program Counter are pushed
onto the stack. At the end of a subroutine or an interrupt routine, signaled by a return instruction,
RET or RETI, the Program Counter is restored to its previous value from the stack. After a device
reset, the Stack Pointer will point to the top of the stack.
If the stack is full and an enabled interrupt takes place, the interrupt request flag will be recorded
but the acknowledge signal will be inhibited. When the Stack Pointer is decremented, by RET or
RETI, the interrupt will be serviced. This feature prevents stack overflow allowing the programmer
to use the structure more easily. However, when the stack is full, a CALL subroutine instruction can
still be executed which will result in a stack overflow. Precautions should be taken to avoid such
cases which might cause unpredictable program branching. If the stack is overflow, the first Program
Counter save in the stack will be lost.
P ro g ra m
T o p o f S ta c k
S ta c k L e v e l 1
S ta c k L e v e l 2
S ta c k
P o in te r
B o tto m
C o u n te r
S ta c k L e v e l 3
o f S ta c k
P ro g ra m
M e m o ry
S ta c k L e v e l 8
Arithmetic and Logic Unit – ALU
The arithmetic-logic unit or ALU is a critical area of the microcontroller that carries out arithmetic
and logic operations of the instruction set. Connected to the main microcontroller data bus, the ALU
receives related instruction codes and performs the required arithmetic or logical operations after
which the result will be placed in the specified register. As these ALU calculation or operations may
result in carry, borrow or other status changes, the status register will be correspondingly updated to
reflect these changes. The ALU supports the following functions:
• Arithmetic operations: ADD, ADDM, ADC, ADCM, SUB, SUBM, SBC, SBCM, DAA
• Logic operations: AND, OR, XOR, ANDM, ORM, XORM, CPL, CPLA
• Rotation: RRA, RR, RRCA, RRC, RLA, RL, RLCA, RLC
• Increment and Decrement: INCA, INC, DECA, DEC
• Branch decision: JMP, SZ, SZA, SNZ, SIZ, SDZ, SIZA, SDZA, CALL, RET, RETI
Rev. 1.10
26
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Flash Program Memory
The Program Memory is the location where the user code or program is stored. For this device the
Program Memory is Flash type, which means it can be programmed and re-programmed a large
number of times, allowing the user the convenience of code modification on the same device.
By using the appropriate programming tools, this Flash device offers users the flexibility to
conveniently debug and develop their applications while also offering a means of field programming
and updating.
Structure
The Program Memory has a capacity of 4K×16 bits. The Program Memory is addressed by the
Program Counter and also contains data, table information and interrupt entries. Table data, which
can be setup in any location within the Program Memory, is addressed by a separate table pointer
register.
Special Vectors
Within the Program Memory, certain locations are reserved for the reset and interrupts. The location
000H is reserved for use by the device reset for program initialisation. After a device reset is
initiated, the program will jump to this location and begin execution.
                  ­
€ ‚ ƒ € ‚ ƒ „ ­ Program Memory Structure
Rev. 1.10
27
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Look-up Table
Any location within the Program Memory can be defined as a look-up table where programmers can
store fixed data. To use the look-up table, the table pointer must first be setup by placing the address
of the look up data to be retrieved in the table pointer register, TBLP and TBHP. These registers
define the total address of the look-up table.
After setting up the table pointer, the table data can be retrieved from the Program Memory using
the “TABRD[m]” or “TABRDL[m]” instructions, respectively. When the instruction is executed,
the lower order table byte from the Program Memory will be transferred to the user defined
Data Memory register [m] as specified in the instruction. The higher order table data byte from
the Program Memory will be transferred to the TBLH special register. Any unused bits in this
transferred higher order byte will be read as “0”.
The accompanying diagram illustrates the addressing data flow of the look-up table.
A d d re s s
L a s t p a g e o r
T B H P R e g is te r
T B L P R e g is te r
Instruction
D a ta
1 6 b its
R e g is te r T B L H
U s e r S e le c te d
R e g is te r
H ig h B y te
L o w B y te
Table Location Bits
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
TABRD [m]
@11
@10
@9
@8
@7
@6
@5
@4
@3
@2
@1
@0
TABRDL [m]
1
1
1
1
@7
@6
@5
@4
@3
@2
@1
@0
Table Location
Note: b11~b0: Table location bits @7~@0: Table pointer (TBLP) bits
@11~@8: Table pointer (TBHP) bits
Table Program Example
The following example shows how the table pointer and table data is defined and retrieved from the
microcontroller. This example uses raw table data located in the Program Memory which is stored
there using the ORG statement. The value at this ORG statement is “F00H” which refers to the start
address of the last page within the 4K words Program Memory of the device. The table pointer is setup
here to have an initial value of “06H”. This will ensure that the first data read from the data table will
be at the Program Memory address “F06H” or 6 locations after the start of the last page. Note that the
value for the table pointer is referenced to the first address of the present page if the “TABRD [m]”
instruction is being used. The high byte of the table data which in this case is equal to zero will be
transferred to the TBLH register automatically when the “TABRD [m]” instruction is executed.
Because the TBLH register is a read-only register and cannot be restored, care should be taken
to ensure its protection if both the main routine and Interrupt Service Routine use table read
instructions. If using the table read instructions, the Interrupt Service Routines may change the
value of the TBLH and subsequently cause errors if used again by the main routine. As a rule it is
recommended that simultaneous use of the table read instructions should be avoided. However, in
situations where simultaneous use cannot be avoided, the interrupts should be disabled prior to the
execution of any main routine table-read instructions. Note that all table related instructions require
two instruction cycles to complete their operation.
Rev. 1.10
28
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Table Read Program Example
tempreg1 db ? ; temporary register #1
tempreg2 db ? ; temporary register #2
:
:
mov a,06h ; initialise low table pointer - note that this address is referenced
mov tblp,a
mov a,0Fh ; initialise high table pointer
mov tbhp,a
:
:
tabrd tempreg1 ; transfers value in table referenced by table pointer data at program
; memory address “F06H” transferred to tempreg1 and TBLH
dec tblp ; reduce value of table pointer by one
tabrd tempreg2 ; transfers value in table referenced by table pointer data at program
; memory address “F05H” transferred to tempreg2 and TBLH in this
; example the data “1AH” is transferred to tempreg1 and data “0FH” to
; register tempreg2
:
:
org F00h; sets initial address of program memory
dc 00Ah, 00Bh, 00Ch, 00Dh, 00Eh, 00Fh, 01Ah, 01Bh
:
:
In Circuit Programming
The provision of Flash type Program Memory provides the user with a means of convenient and easy
upgrades and modifications to their programs on the same device. As an additional convenience,
Holtek has provided a means of programming the microcontroller in-circuit using a 4-pin interface.
This provides manufacturers with the possibility of manufacturing their circuit boards complete with
a programmed or un-programmed microcontroller, and then programming or upgrading the program
at a later stage. This enables product manufacturers to easily keep their manufactured products
supplied with the latest program releases without removal and re-insertion of the device.
The Holtek Flash MCU to Writer Programming Pin correspondence table is as follows:
Holtek Write Pins
MCU Programming Pins
Function
ICPDA
PA6
Programming Serial Data/Address
ICPCK
PA7
Programming Serial Clock
VDD
VDD
Power Supply
VSS
VSS
Ground
During the programming process, the user must take care to ensure that no other outputs are
connected to these two pins.
The Program Memory and EEPROM data memory can both be programmed serially in-circuit using
this 4-wire interface. Data is downloaded and uploaded serially on a single pin with an additional
line for the clock. Two additional lines are required for the power supply. The technical details
regarding the in-circuit programming of the device are beyond the scope of this document and will
be supplied in supplementary literature.
Rev. 1.10
29
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
W r ite r C o n n e c to r
S ig n a ls
M C U
W r ite r _ V D D
V D D
IC P D A
P A 6
IC P C K
P A 7
W r ite r _ V S S
V S S
*
P r o g r a m m in g
P in s
*
T o o th e r C ir c u it
Note: * may be resistor or capacitor. The resistance of * must be greater than 1k or the capacitance
of * must be less than 1nF.
On-Chip Debug Support – OCDS
An EV chip exists for the purposes of device emulation. This EV chip device also provides an
“On-Chip Debug” function to debug the device during the development process. The EV chip
and the actual MCU devices are almost functionally compatible except for the “On-Chip Debug”
function. Users can use the EV chip device to emulate the real chip device behavior by connecting
the OCDSDA and OCDSCK pins to the Holtek HT-IDE development tools. The OCDSDA pin is
the OCDS Data/Address input/output pin while the OCDSCK pin is the OCDS clock input pin.
When users use the EV chip for debugging, other functions which are shared with the OCDSDA
and OCDSCK pins in the actual MCU device will have no effect in the EV chip. However, the two
OCDS pins which are pin-shared with the ICP programming pins are still used as the Flash Memory
programming pins for ICP. For a more detailed OCDS description, refer to the corresponding
document named “Holtek e-Link for 8-bit MCU OCDS User’s Guide”.
Holtek e-Link Pins
EV Chip Pins
OCDSDA
OCDSDA
On-chip Debug Support Data/Address input/output
OCDSCK
OCDSCK
On-chip Debug Support Clock input
VDD
VDD
Power Supply
GND
VSS
Ground
MCU Device
Rev. 1.10
Pin Description
EV Chip Device
HT45F4N
HT45V4N
HT45FH4N
HT45VH4N
30
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
RAM Data Memory
The Data Memory is a volatile area of 8-bit wide RAM internal memory and is the location where
temporary information is stored.
Structure
Divided into two sections, the first of these is an area of RAM, known as the Special Function Data
Memory. Here are located registers which are necessary for correct operation of the device. Many
of these registers can be read from and written to directly under program control, however, some
remain protected from user manipulation. The second area of Data Memory is known as the General
Purpose Data Memory, which is reserved for general purpose use. All locations within this area are
read and write accessible under program control.
00H
Special Purpose
Data Memory
EEC at 40H in Bank 1
7FH
80H
80H in Bank 1
General Purpose
Data Memory
BFH in Bank 1
Bank 0
FFH
Data Memory Structure
The overall Data Memory is subdivided into two banks. The Special Purpose Data Memory registers
are accessible in all banks, with the exception of the EEC register at address 40H, which is only
accessible in Bank 1. Switching between the different Data Memory banks is achieved by setting the
Bank Pointer to the correct value. The start address of the Data Memory for the device is the address
00H.
Rev. 1.10
31
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bank 0, 1
Bank 0, 1
Bank 0
Bank1
00H
IAR0
20H
ADRL
40H Unused
01H
MP0
21H
ADRH
41H
Unused
EEC
Bank 0, 1
60H
OCP0C0
61H
OCP0C1
OCP0DA
02H
IAR1
22H
ADCR0
42H
Unused
62H
03H
MP1
23H
ADCR1
43H
Unused
63H
A0CAL
04H
BP
24H
ACERL
44H
Unused
64H
C0CAL
05H
ACC
25H
ACERH
45H
Unused
65H
OCP1C0
06H
PCL
26H
CTRL
46H
Unused
66H
OCP1C1
OCP1DA
07H
TBLP
27H
LVRC
47H
SCOMC
67H
08H
TBLH
28H
TM0C0
48H
PRM
68H
A1CAL
09H
TBHP
29H
TM0C1
49H
CPR0
69H
C1CAL
0AH
STATUS
2AH
TM0DL
4AH
CPR1
6AH
OCPPC
0BH
SMOD
2BH
TM0DH
4BH
OVPDA
6BH
ADUDA0
0CH
LVDC
2CH
TM0AL
4CH
UVPDA
6CH
ADUDA1
0DH
INTEG
2DH
TM0AH
4DH
OUVPC0
6DH
ADUC0
0EH
INTC0
2EH
TM0RP
4EH
OUVPC1
6EH
ADUC1
0FH
INTC1
2FH
TM1C0
4FH
OUVPC2
6FH
ADUC2
10H
INTC2
30H
TM1C1
50H
TM2C0
70H
Unused
11H
MFI0
31H
TM1DL
51H
TM2C1
71H
Unused
12H
MFI1
32H
TM1DH
52H
TM2DL
72H
Unused
13H
MFI2
33H
TM1AL
53H
TM2DH
73H
Unused
14H
PA
34H
TM1AH
54H
TM2AL
74H
Unused
15H
PAC
35H
TM1PRL
55H
TM2AH
75H
Unused
16H
PAPU
36H
TM1PRH
56H
TM2PRL
76H
Unused
17H
PAWU
37H
PC
57H
TM2PRH
77H
Unused
18H
TMPC1
38H
PCC
58H
TM3C0
78H
Unused
19H
TMPC0
39H
PCPU
59H
TM3C1
79H
Unused
1AH
WDTC
3AH
PD
5AH
TM3DL
7AH
Unused
1BH
TBC
3BH
PDC
5BH
TM3DH
7BH
Unused
1CH
INTC3
3CH
PDPU
5CH
TM3AL
7CH
Unused
1DH
MFI3
3DH
PB
5DH
TM3AH
7DH
Unused
1EH
EEA
3EH
PBC
5EH
TM3PRL
7EH
Unused
1FH
EED
3FH
PBPU
5FH
TM3PRH
7FH
Unused
Special Purpose Data Memory Structure
Rev. 1.10
32
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Special Function Register Description
Most of the Special Function Register details will be described in the relevant functional section.
However, several registers require a separate description in this section.
Indirect Addressing Registers – IAR0, IAR1
The Indirect Addressing Registers, IAR0 and IAR1, although having their locations in normal RAM
register space, do not actually physically exist as normal registers. The method of indirect addressing
for RAM data manipulation uses these Indirect Addressing Registers and Memory Pointers, in
contrast to direct memory addressing, where the actual memory address is specified. Actions on the
IAR0 and IAR1 registers will result in no actual read or write operation to these registers but rather
to the memory location specified by their corresponding Memory Pointers, MP0 or MP1. Acting as a
pair, IAR0 and MP0 can together access data from Bank 0 while the IAR1 and MP1 register pair can
access data from any bank. As the Indirect Addressing Registers are not physically implemented,
reading the Indirect Addressing Registers indirectly will return a result of “00H” and writing to the
registers indirectly will result in no operation.
Memory Pointers – MP0, MP1
Two Memory Pointers, known as MP0 and MP1 are provided. These Memory Pointers are
physically implemented in the Data Memory and can be manipulated in the same way as normal
registers providing a convenient way with which to address and track data. When any operation to
the relevant Indirect Addressing Registers is carried out, the actual address that the microcontroller
is directed to is the address specified by the related Memory Pointer. MP0, together with Indirect
Addressing Register, IAR0, are used to access data from Bank 0, while MP1 and IAR1 are used to
access data from all banks according to BP register. Direct Addressing can only be used with Bank 0,
all other Banks must be addressed indirectly using MP1 and IAR1.
The following example shows how to clear a section of four Data Memory locations already defined
as locations adres1 to adres4.
Indirect Addressing Program Example
data .section ´data´
adres1 db ?
adres2 db ?
adres3 db ?
adres4 db ?
block db ?
code .section at 0 ´code´
org00h
start:
mov a,04h; setup size of block
mov block,a
mov a,offset adres1 ; Accumulator loaded with first RAM address
mov mp0,a ; setup memory pointer with first RAM address
loop:
clr IAR0 ; clear the data at address defined by mp0
inc mp0; increment memory pointer
sdz block ; check if last memory location has been cleared
jmp loop
continue:
The important point to note here is that in the example shown above, no reference is made to specific
Data Memory addresses.
Rev. 1.10
33
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bank Pointer – BP
For this device, the Data Memory is divided into two banks, Bank0 and Bank1. Selecting the
required Data Memory area is achieved using the Bank Pointer. Bit 0 of the Bank Pointer is used to
select Data Memory Banks 0~1.
The Data Memory is initialised to Bank 0 after a reset, except for a WDT time-out reset in the Power
Down Mode, in which case, the Data Memory bank remains unaffected. It should be noted that the
Special Function Data Memory is not affected by the bank selection, which means that the Special
Function Registers can be accessed from within any bank. Directly addressing the Data Memory
will always result in Bank 0 being accessed irrespective of the value of the Bank Pointer. Accessing
data from Bank1 must be implemented using Indirect Addressing.
BP Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DMBP0
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
Bit 7 ~ 1
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 0DMBP0: Select Data Memory Banks
0: Bank 0
1: Bank 1
Accumulator – ACC
The Accumulator is central to the operation of any microcontroller and is closely related with
operations carried out by the ALU. The Accumulator is the place where all intermediate results
from the ALU are stored. Without the Accumulator it would be necessary to write the result of
each calculation or logical operation such as addition, subtraction, shift, etc., to the Data Memory
resulting in higher programming and timing overheads. Data transfer operations usually involve
the temporary storage function of the Accumulator; for example, when transferring data between
one user-defined register and another, it is necessary to do this by passing the data through the
Accumulator as no direct transfer between two registers is permitted.
Program Counter Low Register – PCL
To provide additional program control functions, the low byte of the Program Counter is made
accessible to programmers by locating it within the Special Purpose area of the Data Memory. By
manipulating this register, direct jumps to other program locations are easily implemented. Loading
a value directly into this PCL register will cause a jump to the specified Program Memory location,
however, as the register is only 8-bit wide, only jumps within the current Program Memory page are
permitted. When such operations are used, note that a dummy cycle will be inserted.
Look-up Table Registers – TBLP, TBHP, TBLH
These three special function registers are used to control operation of the look-up table which is
stored in the Program Memory. TBLP and TBHP are the table pointers and indicate the location
where the table data is located. Their value must be setup before any table read commands are
executed. Their value can be changed, for example using the “INC” or “DEC” instructions, allowing
for easy table data pointing and reading. TBLH is the location where the high order byte of the table
data is stored after a table read data instruction has been executed. Note that the lower order table
data byte is transferred to a user defined location.
Rev. 1.10
34
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Status Register – STATUS
This 8-bit register contains the zero flag (Z), carry flag (C), auxiliary carry flag (AC), overflow flag
(OV), power down flag (PDF), and watchdog time-out flag (TO). These arithmetic/logical operation
and system management flags are used to record the status and operation of the microcontroller.
With the exception of the TO and PDF flags, bits in the status register can be altered by instructions
like most other registers. Any data written into the status register will not change the TO or PDF flag.
In addition, operations related to the status register may give different results due to the different
instruction operations. The TO flag can be affected only by a system power-up, a WDT time-out or
by executing the “CLR WDT” or “HALT” instruction. The PDF flag is affected only by executing
the “HALT” or “CLR WDT” instruction or during a system power-up.
The Z, OV, AC and C flags generally reflect the status of the latest operations.
• C is set if an operation results in a carry during an addition operation or if a borrow does not take
place during a subtraction operation; otherwise C is cleared. C is also affected by a rotate through
carry instruction.
• AC is set if an operation results in a carry out of the low nibbles in addition, or no borrow from
the high nibble into the low nibble in subtraction; otherwise AC is cleared.
• Z is set if the result of an arithmetic or logical operation is zero; otherwise Z is cleared.
• OV is set if an operation results in a carry into the highest-order bit but not a carry out of the
highest-order bit, or vice versa; otherwise OV is cleared.
• PDF is cleared by a system power-up or executing the “CLR WDT” instruction. PDF is set by
executing the “HALT” instruction.
• TO is cleared by a system power-up or executing the “CLR WDT” or “HALT” instruction. TO is
set by a WDT time-out.
In addition, on entering an interrupt sequence or executing a subroutine call, the status register will
not be pushed onto the stack automatically. If the contents of the status registers are important and if
the subroutine can corrupt the status register, precautions must be taken to correctly save it.
Rev. 1.10
35
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
STATUS Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
TO
PDF
OV
Z
AC
C
R/W
—
—
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
×
×
×
×
“×” unknown
Bit 7 ~ 6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5TO: Watchdog Time-Out flag
0: After power up or executing the “CLR WDT” or “HALT” instruction
1: A watchdog time-out occurred.
Bit 4PDF: Power down flag
0: After power up or executing the “CLR WDT” instruction
1: By executing the “HALT” instruction
Bit 3OV: Overflow flag
0: no overflow
1: an operation results in a carry into the highest-order bit but not a carry out of the
highest-order bit or vice versa.
Bit 2Z: Zero flag
0: The result of an arithmetic or logical operation is not zero
1: The result of an arithmetic or logical operation is zero
Bit 1AC: Auxiliary flag
0: no auxiliary carry
1: an operation results in a carry out of the low nibbles in addition, or no borrow
from the high nibble into the low nibble in subtraction
Bit 0C: Carry flag
0: no carry-out
1: an operation results in a carry during an addition operation or if a borrow does not
take place during a subtraction operation
C is also affected by a rotate through carry instruction.
Rev. 1.10
36
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
EEPROM Data Memory
One of the special features in the device is its internal EEPROM Data Memory. EEPROM, which
stands for Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory, is by its nature a non-volatile
form of memory, with data retention even when its power supply is removed. By incorporating
this kind of data memory, a whole new host of application possibilities are made available to the
designer. The availability of EEPROM storage allows information such as product identification
numbers, calibration values, specific user data, system setup data or other product information to
be stored directly within the product microcontroller. The process of reading and writing data to the
EEPROM memory has been reduced to a very trivial affair.
EEPROM Data Memory Structure
The EEPROM Data Memory capacity is up to 64×8 bits. Unlike the Program Memory and RAM
Data Memory, the EEPROM Data Memory is not directly mapped and is therefore not directly
accessible in the same way as the other types of memory. Read and Write operations to the
EEPROM are carried out in single byte operations using an address and data register in Bank 0 and
a single control register in Bank 1.
EEPROM Registers
Three registers control the overall operation of the internal EEPROM Data Memory. These are the
address register, EEA, the data register, EED and a single control register, EEC. As both the EEA
and EED registers are located in Bank 0, they can be directly accessed in the same way as any other
Special Function Register. The EEC register however, being located in Bank 1, cannot be directly
addressed directly and can only be read from or written to indirectly using the MP1 Memory Pointer
and Indirect Addressing Register, IAR1. Because the EEC control register is located at address 40H
in Bank 1, the MP1 Memory Pointer must first be set to the value 40H and the Bank Pointer register,
BP, set to the value, 01H, before any operations on the EEC register are executed.
EEPROM Control Registers List
Name
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EEA
—
—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
EED
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
EEC
—
—
—
—
WREN
WR
RDEN
RD
EEA Register
Rev. 1.10
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5 ~ 0
Data EEPROM address
Data EEPROM address bit 5 ~ bit 0
37
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
EED Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0
Data EEPROM data
Data EEPROM data bit 7 ~ bit 0
EEC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
WREN
WR
RDEN
RD
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 4
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 3WREN: Data EEPROM Write Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the Data EEPROM Write Enable Bit which must be set high before Data
EEPROM write operations are carried out. Clearing this bit to zero will inhibit Data
EEPROM write operations.
Bit 2WR: EEPROM Write Control
0: Write cycle has finished
1: Activate a write cycle
This is the Data EEPROM Write Control Bit and when set high by the application
program will activate a write cycle. This bit will be automatically reset to zero by the
hardware after the write cycle has finished. Setting this bit high will have no effect if
the WREN has not first been set high.
Bit 1RDEN: Data EEPROM Read Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the Data EEPROM Read Enable Bit which must be set high before Data
EEPROM read operations are carried out. Clearing this bit to zero will inhibit Data
EEPROM read operations.
Bit 0RD: EEPROM Read Control
0: Read cycle has finished
1: Activate a read cycle
This is the Data EEPROM Read Control Bit and when set high by the application
program will activate a read cycle. This bit will be automatically reset to zero by the
hardware after the read cycle has finished. Setting this bit high will have no effect if
the RDEN has not first been set high.
Note: The WREN, WR, RDEN and RD can not be set to “1” at the same time in one instruction. The
WR and RD can not be set to “1” at the same time.
Rev. 1.10
38
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Reading Data from the EEPROM
To read data from the EEPROM, the read enable bit, RDEN, in the EEC register must first be set
high to enable the read function. The EEPROM address of the data to be read must then be placed
in the EEA register. If the RD bit in the EEC register is now set high, a read cycle will be initiated.
Setting the RD bit high will not initiate a read operation if the RDEN bit has not been set. When
the read cycle terminates, the RD bit will be automatically cleared to zero, after which the data can
be read from the EED register. The data will remain in the EED register until another read or write
operation is executed. The application program can poll the RD bit to determine when the data is
valid for reading.
Writing Data to the EEPROM
The EEPROM address of the data to be written must first be placed in the EEA register and the data
placed in the EED register. To write data to the EEPROM, the write enable bit, WREN, in the EEC
register must first be set high to enable the write function. After this, the WR bit in the EEC register
must be immediately set high to initiate a write cycle. These two instructions must be executed
consecutively. The global interrupt bit EMI should also first be cleared before implementing any
write operations, and then set again after the write cycle has started. Note that setting the WR bit
high will not initiate a write cycle if the WREN bit has not been set. As the EEPROM write cycle is
controlled using an internal timer whose operation is asynchronous to microcontroller system clock,
a certain time will elapse before the data will have been written into the EEPROM. Detecting when
the write cycle has finished can be implemented either by polling the WR bit in the EEC register or
by using the EEPROM interrupt. When the write cycle terminates, the WR bit will be automatically
cleared to zero by the microcontroller, informing the user that the data has been written to the
EEPROM. The application program can therefore poll the WR bit to determine when the write cycle
has ended.
Write Protection
Protection against inadvertent write operation is provided in several ways. After the device is
powered-on the Write Enable bit in the control register will be cleared preventing any write
operations. Also at power-on the Bank Pointer, BP, will be reset to zero, which means that Data
Memory Bank 0 will be selected. As the EEPROM control register is located in Bank 1, this adds a
further measure of protection against spurious write operations. During normal program operation,
ensuring that the Write Enable bit in the control register is cleared will safeguard against incorrect
write operations.
EEPROM Interrupt
The EEPROM write interrupt is generated when an EEPROM write cycle has ended. The EEPROM
interrupt must first be enabled by setting the DEE bit in the relevant interrupt register. However as
the EEPROM is contained within a Multi-function Interrupt, the associated multi-function interrupt
enable bit must also be set. When an EEPROM write cycle ends, the DEF request flag and its
associated multi-function interrupt request flag will both be set. If the global, EEPROM and Multifunction interrupts are enabled and the stack is not full, a jump to the associated Multi-function
Interrupt vector will take place. When the interrupt is serviced only the Multi-function interrupt flag
will be automatically reset, the EEPROM interrupt flag must be manually reset by the application
program. More details can be obtained in the Interrupt section.
Rev. 1.10
39
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programming Considerations
Care must be taken that data is not inadvertently written to the EEPROM. Protection can be Periodic
by ensuring that the Write Enable bit is normally cleared to zero when not writing. Also the Bank
Pointer could be normally cleared to zero as this would inhibit access to Bank 1 where the EEPROM
control register exist. Although certainly not necessary, consideration might be given in the
application program to the checking of the validity of new write data by a simple read back process.
When writing data the WR bit must be set high immediately after the WREN bit has been set high,
to ensure the write cycle executes correctly. The global interrupt bit EMI should also be cleared
before a write cycle is executed and then re-enabled after the write cycle starts. Note that the device
should not enter the IDLE or SLEEP mode until the EEPROM read or write operation is totally
complete, otherwise, the EEPROM read or write operation will fail. Note that the device should
not enter the IDLE or SLEEP mode until the EEPROM read or write operation is totally complete.
Otherwise, the EEPROM read or write operation will fail.
Programming Examples
Reading data from the EEPROM - polling method
MOV A, EEPROM_ADRES
MOV EEA, A
MOV A, 040H MOV MP1, A MOV A, 01H MOV BP, A
SET IAR1.1 SET IAR1.0 BACK:
SZ IAR1.0 JMP BACK
CLR IAR1 CLR BP
MOV A, EED MOV READ_DATA, A
; user defined address
; setup memory pointer MP1
; MP1 points to EEC register
; setup Bank Pointer
; set RDEN bit, enable read operations
; start Read Cycle - set RD bit
; check for read cycle end
; disable EEPROM read/write
; move read data to register
Writing Data to the EEPROM - polling method
MOV A, EEPROM_ADRES
MOV EEA, A
MOV A, EEPROM_DATA
MOV EED, A
MOV A, 040H MOV MP1, A MOV A, 01H MOV BP, A CLR EMI
SET IAR1.3 SET IAR1.2 SET EMI
BACK:
SZ IAR1.2 JMP BACK
CLR IAR1 CLR BP
Rev. 1.10
; user defined address
; user defined data
;
;
;
;
; set WREN bit, enable write operations
; start Write Cycle - set WR bit – executed immediately
; after set WREN bit
; check for write cycle end
; disable EEPROM read/write
setup memory pointer MP1
MP1 points to EEC register
setup Bank Pointer
BP points to data memory bank 1
40
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Oscillator
Various oscillator options offer the user a wide range of functions according to their various
application requirements. The flexible features of the oscillator functions ensure that the best
optimisation can be achieved in terms of speed and power saving. Oscillator selections and operation
are selected through registers.
Oscillator Overview
In addition to being the source of the main system clock the oscillators also provide clock sources
for the Watchdog Timer and Time Base Interrupts. Fully integrated internal oscillators, requiring no
external components, are provided to form a wide range of both fast and slow system oscillators.
The higher frequency oscillators provide higher performance but carry with it the disadvantage of
higher power requirements, while the opposite is of course true for the lower frequency oscillators.
With the capability of dynamically switching between fast and slow system clock, the device has the
flexibility to optimize the performance/power ratio, a feature especially important in power sensitive
portable applications.
Name
Freq.
Internal High Speed RC
Type
HIRC
30MHz
Internal Low Speed RC
LIRC
32kHz
Oscillator Types
System Clock Configurations
There are two methods of generating the system clock, a high speed oscillator and a low speed
oscillator. The high speed oscillator is the internal 30MHz RC oscillator. The low speed oscillator
is the internal 32kHz (LIRC) oscillator. Selecting whether the low or high speed oscillator is used
as the system oscillator is implemented using the HLCLK bit and CKS2 ~ CKS0 bits in the SMOD
register and as the system clock can be dynamically selected.
The actual source clock used for the high speed and the low speed oscillators is chosen via registers.
The frequency of the slow speed or high speed system clock is also determined using the HLCLK
bit and CKS2 ~ CKS0 bits in the SMOD register. Note that two oscillator selections must be made
namely one high speed and one low speed system oscillators. It is not possible to choose a nooscillator selection for either the high or low speed oscillator.
  
  
   ­ System Clock Configurations
Rev. 1.10
41
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Internal RC Oscillator – HIRC
The internal RC oscillator is a fully integrated system oscillator requiring no external components.
The internal RC oscillator has a frequency of 30MHz. Device trimming during the manufacturing
process and the inclusion of internal frequency compensation circuits are used to ensure that
the influence of the power supply voltage, temperature and process variations on the oscillation
frequency are minimised. Note that if this internal system clock option is selected, as it requires no
external pins for its operation.
Internal 32kHz Oscillator – LIRC
The Internal 32kHz System Oscillator is the low frequency oscillator. It is a fully integrated
RC oscillator with a typical frequency of 32kHz at 5V, requiring no external components for its
implementation. Device trimming during the manufacturing process and the inclusion of internal
frequency compensation circuits are used to ensure that the influence of the power supply voltage,
temperature and process variations on the oscillation frequency are minimised.
Operating Modes and System Clocks
Present day applications require that their microcontrollers have high performance but often still
demand that they consume as little power as possible, conflicting requirements that are especially
true in battery powered portable applications. The fast clocks required for high performance will
by their nature increase current consumption and of course vice-versa, lower speed clocks reduce
current consumption. As Holtek has provided this device with both high and low speed clock
sources and the means to switch between them dynamically, the user can optimise the operation of
their microcontroller to achieve the best performance/power ratio.
System Clocks
The device has many different clock sources for both the CPU and peripheral function operation.
By providing the user with a wide range of clock options using configuration options and register
programming, a clock system can be configured to obtain maximum application performance.
The main system clock, can come from either a high frequency, fH, or low frequency, fL, source,
and is selected using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD register. The high speed
system clock can be sourced from the HIRC oscillator. The low speed system clock source can be
sourced from the LIRC oscillator. The other choice, which is a divided version of the high speed
system oscillator has a range of fH/2~fH/64.
Rev. 1.10
42
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
   


 
­
 € ‚ ƒ „ … System Clock Configurations
Note: When the system clock source fSYS is switched to fL from fH, the high speed oscillation will stop to conserve
the power. Thus there is no fH~fH/64 for peripheral circuit to use.
System Operation Modes
There are five different modes of operation for the microcontroller, each one with its own
special characteristics and which can be chosen according to the specific performance and
power requirements of the application. There are two modes allowing normal operation of the
microcontroller, the NORMAL Mode and SLOW Mode. The remaining three modes, the SLEEP,
IDLE0 and IDLE1 Mode are used when the microcontroller CPU is switched off to conserve power.
Rev. 1.10
Description
Operating
Mode
CPU
fSYS
fS
fTBC
NORMAL mode
On
fH~fH/64
On
On
SLOW mode
On
fL
On
On
ILDE0 mode
Off
Off
On
On
IDLE1 mode
Off
On
On
On
SLEEP mode
Off
Off
On
Off
43
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
NORMAL Mode
As the name suggests this is one of the main operating modes where the microcontroller has all of
its functions operational and where the system clock is provided by the high speed oscillator. This
mode operates allowing the microcontroller to operate normally with a clock source will come from
the high speed oscillator, HIRC. The high speed oscillator will however first be divided by a ratio
ranging from 1 to 64, the actual ratio being selected by the CKS2~CKS0 and HLCLK bits in the
SMOD register. Although a high speed oscillator is used, running the microcontroller at a divided
clock ratio reduces the operating current.
SLOW Mode
This is also a mode where the microcontroller operates normally although now with a slower speed
clock source. The clock source used will be from fL. Running the microcontroller in this mode
allows it to run with much lower operating currents. In the SLOW Mode, the fH is off.
SLEEP Mode
The SLEEP Mode is entered when an HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD register is low. In the SLEEP mode the CPU will be stopped. However the fS clocks will
continue to operate if the LVDEN is “1” or the Watchdog Timer function is enabled.
IDLE0 Mode
The IDLE0 Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD register is high and the FSYSON bit in the CTRL register is low. In the IDLE0 Mode the
system oscillator will be inhibited from driving the CPU, the system oscillator will be stopped, the
low frequency clock fL will be on.
IDLE1 Mode
The IDLE1 Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD register is high and the FSYSON bit in the CTRL register is high. In the IDLE1 Mode the
system oscillator will be inhibited from driving the CPU, the system oscillator will continue to run,
and this system oscillator may be high speed or low speed system oscillator. In the IDLE1 Mode the
low frequency clock fL will be on.
Note: If LVDEN=1 and the SLEEP or IDLE mode is entered, the LVD and bandgap functions will
not be disabled, and the fL clock will be forced to open.
Rev. 1.10
44
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Control Register
The SMOD register is used to control the internal clocks within the device.
SMOD Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
—
LTO
HTO
IDLEN
HLCLK
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R
R
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
0
—
0
0
1
0
CKS2 ~ CKS0: The system clock selection when HLCLK is “0”
000: fL
001: fL
010: fH/64
011: fH/32
100: fH/16
101: fH/8
110: fH/4
111: fH/2
These three bits are used to select which clock is used as the system clock source. In
addition to the system clock source, which can be LIRC, a divided version of the high
speed system oscillator can also be chosen as the system clock source.
Bit 4
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 3LTO: LIRC System OSC SST ready flag
0: Not ready
1: Ready
This is the low speed system oscillator SST ready flag which indicates when the low
speed system oscillator is stable after power on reset or a wake-up has occurred. The
flag will change to a high level after tSST cycles.
Bit 2HTO: HIRC System OSC SST ready flag
0: Not ready
1: Ready
This is the high speed system oscillator SST ready flag which indicates when the high
speed system oscillator is stable after a wake-up has occurred. This flag is cleared to
“0” by hardware when the device is powered on and then changes to a high level after
the high speed system oscillator is stable. Therefore this flag will always be read as “1”
by the application program after device power-on. The flag will be low when in the
SLEEP or IDLE0 Mode but after power on reset or a wake-up has occurred, the flag
will change to a high level after tSST clock cycles if the HIRC oscillator is used.
Bit 1IDLEN: IDLE Mode Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the IDLE Mode Control bit and determines what happens when the HALT
instruction is executed. If this bit is high, when a HALT instruction is executed the
device will enter the IDLE Mode. In the IDLE1 Mode the CPU will stop running
but the system clock will continue to keep the peripheral functions operational, if
FSYSON bit is high. If FSYSON bit is low, the CPU and the system clock will all stop
in IDLE0 mode. If the bit is low the device will enter the SLEEP Mode when a HALT
instruction is executed.
Bit 0HLCLK: System Clock Selection
0: fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fL
1: fH
This bit is used to select if the fH clock or the fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fL clock is used as the
system clock. When the bit is high the fH clock will be selected and if low the fH/2 ~
fH/64 or fL clock will be selected. When system clock switches from the fH clock to the
fL clock and the fH clock will be automatically switched off to conserve power.
Bit 7 ~ 5
Rev. 1.10
45
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
CTRL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
FSYSON
—
—
—
—
LVRF
LRF
WRF
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
—
—
—
—
×
0
0
Bit 7 FSYSON: fSYS Control in IDLE Mode
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 6~3
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2LVRF: LVR function reset flag
0: Not occur
1: Occurred
This bit is set high when a specific Low Voltage Reset situation condition occurs. This
bit can only be cleared to zero by the application program.
Bit 1LRF: LVRC Control register software reset flag
0: Not occur
1: Occurred
This bit is set high if the LVRC register contains any non defined LVR voltage register
values. This in effect acts like a software reset function. This bit can only be cleared to
zero by the application program.
Bit 0WRF: WDT Control register software reset flag
0: Not occur
1: Occurred
This bit is set high by the WDT Control register software reset and cleared by the
application program. Note that this bit can only be cleared to zero by the application
program.
  
   
  
   
  
Rev. 1.10
46
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Operating Mode Switching
The device can switch between operating modes dynamically allowing the user to select the best
performance/power ratio for the present task in hand. In this way microcontroller operations that
do not require high performance can be executed using slower clocks thus requiring less operating
current and prolonging battery life in portable applications.
In simple terms, Mode Switching between the NORMAL Mode and SLOW Mode is executed
using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD register while Mode Switching from the
NORMAL/SLOW Modes to the SLEEP/IDLE Modes is executed via the HALT instruction. When
a HALT instruction is executed, whether the device enters the IDLE Mode or the SLEEP Mode is
determined by the condition of the IDLEN bit in the SMOD register and FSYSON in the CTRL
register.
When the HLCLK bit switches to a low level, which implies that clock source is switched from the
high speed clock source, fH, to the clock source, fH/2~fH/64 or fL. If the clock is from the fL, the high
speed clock source will stop running to conserve power. When this happens it must be noted that the
fH/16 and fH/64 internal clock sources will also stop running, which may affect the operation of other
internal functions such as the TMs. The accompanying flowchart shows what happens when the
device moves between the various operating modes.
NORMAL Mode to SLOW Mode Switching
When running in the NORMAL Mode, which uses the high speed system oscillator, and therefore
consumes more power, the system clock can switch to run in the SLOW Mode by setting the
HLCLK bit to “0” and setting the CKS2~CKS0 bits to “000” or “001” in the SMOD register. This
will then use the low speed system oscillator which will consume less power. Users may decide to
do this for certain operations which do not require high performance and can subsequently reduce
power consumption.
The SLOW Mode is sourced from the LIRC oscillator and therefore requires this oscillator to be
stable before full mode switching occurs. This is monitored using the LTO bit in the SMOD register.
 
            ­             ­            Rev. 1.10
47
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
SLOW Mode to NORMAL Mode Switching
In SLOW Mode the system uses LIRC low speed system oscillator. To switch back to the NORMAL
Mode, where the high speed system oscillator is used, the HLCLK bit should be set to “1” or
HLCLK bit is “0”, but CKS2~CKS0 is set to “010”, “011”, “100”, “101”, “110” or “111”. As a
certain amount of time will be required for the high frequency clock to stabilise, the status of the
HTO bit is checked. The amount of time required for high speed system oscillator stabilization
depends upon which high speed system oscillator type is used.
 
           ­            ­            Rev. 1.10
48
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Entering the SLEEP Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the SLEEP Mode and that is to execute the “HALT”
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to “0” and the
WDT or LVD on. When this instruction is executed under the conditions described above, the
following will occur:
• The system clock and Time Base clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at
the “HALT” instruction, but the WDT or LVD will remain with the clock source coming from the
fL clock.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and resume counting
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Entering the IDLE0 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the IDLE0 Mode and that is to execute the “HALT”
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to “1” and the
FSYSON bit in CTRL register equal to “0”. When this instruction is executed under the conditions
described above, the following will occur:
• The system clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at the “HALT” instruction, but the Time Base clock fTBC and the low frequency fL clock will be on.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and resume counting.
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Entering the IDLE1 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the IDLE1 Mode and that is to execute the “HALT”
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to “1” and the
FSYSON bit in CTRL register equal to “1”. When this instruction is executed under the conditions
described above, the following will occur:
• The system clock and Time Base clock and fTBC and the low frequency fL will be on and the application program will stop at the “HALT” instruction.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and resume counting.
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Rev. 1.10
49
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Standby Current Considerations
As the main reason for entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode is to keep the current consumption of
the device to as low a value as possible, perhaps only in the order of several micro-amps except
in the IDLE1 Mode, there are other considerations which must also be taken into account by the
circuit designer if the power consumption is to be minimised. Special attention must be made to
the I/O pins on the device. All high-impedance input pins must be connected to either a fixed high
or low level as any floating input pins could create internal oscillations and result in increased
current consumption. This also applies to devices which have different package types, as there may
be unbonbed pins. These must either be setup as outputs or if setup as inputs must have pull-high
resistors connected.
Care must also be taken with the loads, which are connected to I/O pins, which are setup as
outputs. These should be placed in a condition in which minimum current is drawn or connected
only to external circuits that do not draw current, such as other CMOS inputs. In the IDLE1 Mode
the system oscillator is on, if the system oscillator is from the high speed system oscillator, the
additional standby current will also be perhaps in the order of several hundred micro-amps.
Wake-up
After the system enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, it can be woken up from one of various sources
listed as follows:
• An external falling edge on Port A
• A system interrupt
• A WDT overflow
If the device is woken up by a WDT overflow, a Watchdog Timer reset will be initiated. The actual
source of the wake-up can be determined by examining the TO and PDF flags. The PDF flag is
cleared by a system power-up or executing the clear Watchdog Timer instructions and is set when
executing the “HALT” instruction. The TO flag is set if a WDT time-out occurs, and causes a wakeup that only resets the Program Counter and Stack Pointer, the other flags remain in their original
status.
Each pin on Port A can be setup using the PAWU register to permit a negative transition on the pin
to wake-up the system. When a Port A pin wake-up occurs, the program will resume execution at
the instruction following the “HALT” instruction. If the system is woken up by an interrupt, then
two possible situations may occur. The first is where the related interrupt is disabled or the interrupt
is enabled but the stack is full, in which case the program will resume execution at the instruction
following the “HALT” instruction. In this situation, the interrupt which woke-up the device will not
be immediately serviced, but will rather be serviced later when the related interrupt is finally enabled
or when a stack level becomes free. The other situation is where the related interrupt is enabled and
the stack is not full, in which case the regular interrupt response takes place. If an interrupt request
flag is set high before entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, the wake-up function of the related
interrupt will be disabled.
Rev. 1.10
50
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Watchdog Timer
The Watchdog Timer is provided to prevent program malfunctions or sequences from jumping to
unknown locations, due to certain uncontrollable external events such as electrical noise.
Watchdog Timer Clock Source
The Watchdog Timer clock source is provided by the internal fL clock which is in turn supplied
by the LIRC oscillator. The Watchdog Timer source clock is then subdivided by a ratio of 28 to
218 to give longer timeouts, the actual value being chosen using the WS2~WS0 bits in the WDTC
register. The LIRC internal oscillator has an approximate period of 32kHz at a supply voltage of 5V.
However, it should be noted that this specified internal clock period can vary with VDD, temperature
and process variations.
Watchdog Timer Control Register
A single register, WDTC, controls the required timeout period as well as the enable/disable
operation. The WDTC register is initiated to 01010011B at any reset but keeps unchanged at the
WDT time-out occurrence in a power down state.
WDTC Register
Rev. 1.10
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
WE4
WE3
WE2
WE1
WE0
WS2
WS1
WS0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
bit 7~ 3
WE4 ~ WE0: WDT enable bit
10101 or 01010: Enabled
Other: Reset MCU
If these bits are changed due to adverse environmental conditions, the microcontroller
will be reset. The reset operation will be activated after 2~3 LIRC clock cycles and the
WRF bit in the CTRL register will be set high.
bit 2~ 0
WS2 ~ WS0: Select WDT Timeout Period
000: 28/fS
001: 210/fS
010: 212/fS
011: 214/fS
100: 215/fS
101: 216/fS
110: 217/fS
111: 218/fS
These three bits determine the division ratio of the Watchdog Timer source clock,
which in turn determines the timeout period.
51
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
CTRL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
FSYSON
—
—
—
—
LVRF
LRF
WRF
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
—
—
—
—
×
0
0
Bit 7
FSYSON: fSYS Control IDLE Mode
Describe elsewhere
Bit 6~ 3
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2LVRF: LVR function reset flag
Describe elsewhere
Bit 1LRF: LVR Control register software reset flag
Describe elsewhere
Bit 0WRF: WDT Control register software reset flag
0: Not occur
1: Occurred
This bit is set high by the WDT Control register software reset and cleared by the
application program. Note that this bit can only be cleared to zero by the application
program.
Watchdog Timer Operation
The Watchdog Timer operates by providing a device reset when its timer overflows. This means
that in the application program and during normal operation the user has to strategically clear the
Watchdog Timer before it overflows to prevent the Watchdog Timer from executing a reset. This is
done using the clear watchdog instructions. If the program malfunctions for whatever reason, jumps
to an unknown location, or enters an endless loop, these clear instructions will not be executed in
the correct manner, in which case the Watchdog Timer will overflow and reset the device. There are
five bits, WE4~WE0, in the WDTC register to offer enable and reset control of the Watchdog Timer.
When the WE4~WE0 bits value are equal to 01010B or 10101B, the WDT function is enabled.
However, if the WE4~WE0 bits are changed to any other values except 01010B and 10101B, which
could be caused by adverse environmental conditions such as noise, it will reset the microcontroller
after 2~3 LIRC clock cycles. After power on these bits will have a value of 01010B.
WE4 ~ WE0 Bits
WDT Function
01010B or 10101B
Enable
Any other value
Reset MCU
Watchdog Timer Enable/Disable Control
Under normal program operation, a Watchdog Timer time-out will initialise a device reset and set
the status bit TO. However, if the system is in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, when a Watchdog Timer
time-out occurs, the TO bit in the status register will be set and only the Program Counter and Stack
Pointer will be reset. Three methods can be adopted to clear the contents of the Watchdog Timer.
The first is a WDT reset, which means a certain value is written into the WE4~WE0 bit filed except
01010B and 10101B, the second is using the Watchdog Timer software clear instructions and the
third is via a HALT instruction.
There is only one method of using software instruction to clear the Watchdog Timer. That is to use
the single “CLR WDT” instruction to clear the WDT.
The maximum time-out period is when the 218 division ratio is selected. As an example, with a 32
kHz LIRC oscillator as its source clock, this will give a maximum watchdog period of around 8
seconds for the 218 division ratio, and a minimum timeout of 7.8ms for the 28 division ration.
Rev. 1.10
52
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
WDTC Registe�
WE�~WE0 bits
Reset �CU
CLR
“HALT”Inst�u�tion
“CLR WDT”Inst�u�tion
LIRC
fS
�-stage Divide�
fS/��
WDT P�es�ale�
WS�~WS0
(fS/�� ~ fS/�1�)
WDT Time-out
(��/fS ~ �1�/fS)
�-to-1 �UX
Watchdog Timer
Reset and Initialisation
A reset function is a fundamental part of any microcontroller ensuring that the device can be set
to some predetermined condition irrespective of outside parameters. The most important reset
condition is after power is first applied to the microcontroller. In this case, internal circuitry will
ensure that the microcontroller, after a short delay, will be in a well defined state and ready to
execute the first program instruction. After this power-on reset, certain important internal registers
will be set to defined states before the program commences. One of these registers is the Program
Counter, which will be reset to zero forcing the microcontroller to begin program execution from the
lowest Program Memory address.
Another type of reset is when the Watchdog Timer overflows and resets the microcontroller. All
types of reset operations result in different register conditions being setup. Another reset exists in the
form of a Low Voltage Reset, LVR, where a full reset is implemented in situations where the power
supply voltage falls below a certain threshold.
Reset Functions
There are four ways in which a microcontroller reset can occur, through events occurring internally:
• Power-on Reset
The most fundamental and unavoidable reset is the one that occurs after power is first applied to
the microcontroller. As well as ensuring that the Program Memory begins execution from the first
memory address, a power-on reset also ensures that certain other registers are preset to known
conditions. All the I/O port and port control registers will power up in a high condition ensuring
that all pins will be first set to inputs.
VDD
Powe�-on
Reset
tRSTD
SST Time-out
Note: tRSTD is power-on delay, typical time=16.7ms
Power-On Reset Timing Chart
Rev. 1.10
53
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
• Low Voltage Reset – LVR
The microcontroller contains a low voltage reset circuit in order to monitor the supply voltage of
the device. The LVR function is always enabled with a specific LVR voltage, VLVR. If the supply
voltage of the device drops to within a range of 0.9V~VLVR such as might occur when changing
the battery, the LVR will automatically reset the device internally and the LVRF bit in the
CTRL register will also be set high. For a valid LVR signal, a low voltage, i.e., a voltage in the
range between 0.9V~VLVR must exist for greater than the value tLVR specified in the LVD&LVR
characteristics. If the low voltage state does not exceed this value, the LVR will ignore the low
supply voltage and will not perform a reset function.
The actual VLVR is fixed at a value of 2.55V. However, the LVS7~LVS0 bits still have effects on
the LVR function. If the LVS7~LVS0 bits are changed to any other value except some certain
values defined in the LVRC register by the environmental noise, the LVR will reset the device
after 2~3 LIRC clock cycles. When this happens, the LRF bit in the CTRL register will be set
high. After power on the register will have the value of 01010101B. Note that the LVR function
will be automatically disabled when the device enters the power down mode.
Note:tRSTD is power-on delay, typical time=16.7ms
Low Voltage Reset Timing Chart
• LVRC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
LVS7
LVS6
LVS5
LVS4
LVS3
LVS2
LVS1
LVS0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
POR
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 7 ~ 0
Rev. 1.10
LVS7 ~ LVS0: LVR Voltage Select control
01010101: 2.55V
00110011: 2.55V
10011001: 2.55V
10101010: 2.55V
Any other value: Generates MCU reset – register is reset to POR value
When an actual low voltage condition occurs, an MCU reset will be generated. The
reset operation will be activated after 2~3 LIRC clock cycles. In this situation this
register contents will remain the same after such a reset occurs.
Any register value, other than the defined value above, will also result in the
generation of an MCU reset. The reset operation will be activated after 2~3 LIRC
clock cycles. However in this situation this register contents will be reset to the POR
value.
54
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
• CTRL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
FSYSON
—
—
—
—
LVRF
LRF
WRF
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
—
—
—
—
×
0
0
Bit 7
FSYSON: fSYS Control IDLE Mode
Describe elsewhere
Bit 6~ 3
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2LVRF: LVR function reset flag
0: Not occur
1: Occurred
This bit is set high when a specific Low Voltage Reset situation condition occurs. This
bit can only be cleared to zero by the application program.
Bit 1LRF: LVR Control register software reset flag
0: Not occur
1: Occurred
This bit is set high if the LVRC register contains any non defined LVR voltage register
values. This in effect acts like a software reset function. This bit can only be cleared to
zero by the application program.
Bit 0WRF: WDT Control register software reset flag
Describe elsewhere
• Watchdog Time-out Reset during Normal Operation
The Watchdog time-out Reset during normal operation is the same as a LVR reset except that the
Watchdog time-out flag TO will be set high.
Note: tRSTD is power-on delay, typical time=16.7ms
WDT Time-out Reset during Normal Operation Timing Chart
• Watchdog Time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Mode
The Watchdog time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Mode is a little different from other kinds
of reset. Most of the conditions remain unchanged except that the Program Counter and the Stack
Pointer will be cleared to zero and the TO flag will be set high. Refer to the A.C. Characteristics
for tSST details.
WDT Time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Timing Chart
Rev. 1.10
55
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Reset Initial Conditions
The different types of reset described affect the reset flags in different ways. These flags, known
as PDF and TO are located in the status register and are controlled by various microcontroller
operations, such as the SLEEP or IDLE Mode function or Watchdog Timer. The reset flags are
shown in the table:
TO
PDF
0
0
Power-on reset
RESET Conditions
u
u
LVR reset during NORMAL or SLOW Mode operation
1
u
WDT time-out reset during NORMAL or SLOW Mode operation
1
1
WDT time-out reset during IDLE or SLEEP Mode operation
Note: “u” stands for unchanged
The following table indicates the way in which the various components of the microcontroller are
affected after a power-on reset occurs.
Item
Condition After RESET
Program Counter
Reset to zero
Interrupts
All interrupts will be disabled
WDT
Clear after reset, WDT begins counting
Timer Modules
Timer Modules will be turned off
Input/Output Ports
I/O ports will be setup as inputs and AN0~AN13 as A/D input pins
Stack Pointer
Stack Pointer will point to the top of the stack
The different kinds of resets all affect the internal registers of the microcontroller in different ways.
To ensure reliable continuation of normal program execution after a reset occurs, it is important to
know what condition the microcontroller is in after a particular reset occurs. The following table
describes how each type of reset affects each of the microcontroller internal registers.
Reset
(Power On)
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
LVR Reset
WDT Time-out
(SLEEP/IDLE)
MP0
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
MP1
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
BP
---- ---0
---- ---0
---- ---0
---- ---u
ACC
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
PCL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
TBLP
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TBLH
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TBHP
---- xxxx
---- uuuu
---- uuuu
---- uuuu
STATUS
--00 xxxx
--1u uuuu
--uu uuuu
- - 11 u u u u
SMOD
11 0 - 0 0 1 0
11 0 - 0 0 1 0
11 0 - 0 0 1 0
uuu- uuuu
LVDC
--00 -000
--00 -000
--00 -000
--uu -uuu
INTEG
--00 0000
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
INTC0
-000 0000
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
Register
INTC1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
INTC2
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
INTC3
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
MFI0
-000 -000
-000 -000
-000 -000
-uuu -uuu
MFI1
--00 --00
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
MFI2
--00 --00
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
MFI3
--00 --00
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
PA
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PAC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
Rev. 1.10
56
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Reset
(Power On)
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
LVR Reset
WDT Time-out
(SLEEP/IDLE)
PAPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PAWU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PB
- - - 1 1111
- - - 1 1111
- - - 1 1111
---u uuuu
PBC
- - - 1 1111
- - - 1 1111
- - - 1 1111
---u uuuu
PBPU
---0 0000
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
PC
- 111 1111
- 111 1111
- 111 1111
-uuu uuuu
PCC
- 111 1111
- 111 1111
- 111 1111
-uuu uuuu
PCPU
-000 0000
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
PD
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
--uu uuuu
PDC
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
--uu uuuu
PDPU
--00 0000
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
TMPC0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0
uuuu uuuu
TMPC1
11 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0
uuuu uuuu
WDTC
0 1 0 1 0 0 11
0 1 0 1 0 0 11
0 1 0 1 0 0 11
uuuu uuuu
TBC
0 0 11 - 111
0 0 11 - 111
0 0 11 - 111
uuuu -uuu
EEA
--00 0000
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
EED
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
EEC
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
ADRL
(ADRFS=0)
xxxx ----
xxxx ----
xxxx ----
uuuu ----
ADRL
(ADRFS=1)
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
ADRH
(ADRFS=0)
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
ADRH
(ADRFS=1)
---- xxxx
---- xxxx
---- xxxx
---- uuuu
ADCR0
0 11 0 0 0 0 0
0 11 0 0 0 0 0
0 11 0 0 0 0 0
uuuu uuuu
ADCR1
00-0 -000
00-0 -000
00-0 -000
uu-u -uuu
ACERL
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
ACERH
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
--uu uuuu
CTRL
0--- -x00
0--- -000
0--- -000
u--- -uuu
LVRC
0101 0101
0101 0101
0101 0101
uuuu uuuu
TM0C0
0000 0---
0000 0---
0000 0---
uuuu u---
TM0C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0DH
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0AH
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0RP
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1C0
0000 0---
0000 0---
0000 0---
uuuu u---
TM1C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM1AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM1RPL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1RPH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM2C0
0000 0---
0000 0---
0000 0---
uuuu u---
Register
Rev. 1.10
57
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Reset
(Power On)
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
LVR Reset
WDT Time-out
(SLEEP/IDLE)
TM2C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM2DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM2DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM2AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM2AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM2RPL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM2RPH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM3C0
0000 0---
0000 0---
0000 0---
uuuu u---
TM3C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM3DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM3DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM3AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM3AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM3RPL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM3RPH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
CPR0
---0 0000
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
CPR1
---0 0000
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
SCOMC
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
Register
PRM
-000 0000
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
OVPDA
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
UVPDA
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
OUVPC0
x000 -000
x000 -000
x000 -000
uuuu -uuu
OUVPC1
x000 --00
x000 --00
x000 --00
uuuu --uu
OUVPC2
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
OCP0C0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
OCP0C1
x000 0000
x000 0000
x000 0000
uuuu uuuu
OCP0DA
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
A0CAL
0010 0000
0010 0000
0010 0000
uuuu uuuu
C0CAL
x001 0000
x001 0000
x001 0000
uuuu uuuu
OCP1C0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
OCP1C1
x000 0000
x000 0000
x000 0000
uuuu uuuu
OCP1DA
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
A1CAL
0010 0000
0010 0000
0010 0000
uuuu uuuu
C1CAL
x001 0000
x001 0000
x001 0000
uuuu uuuu
OCPPC
- - 0 0 1111
- - 0 0 1111
- - 0 0 1111
--uu uuuu
ADUDA0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
ADUDA1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
ADUC0
-000 0000
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
ADUC1
--00 00-0
--00 00-0
--00 00-0
--uu uu-u
ADUC2
--00 0000
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
Note: "-" not implement
"u" stands for "unchanged"
"x" stands for "unknown"
Rev. 1.10
58
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Input/Output Ports
Holtek microcontrollers offer considerable flexibility on their I/O ports. With the input or output
designation of every pin fully under user program control, pull-high selections for all ports and
wake-up selections on certain pins, the user is provided with an I/O structure to meet the needs of a
wide range of application possibilities.
The device provides bidirectional input/output lines labeled with port names PA~PD. These I/O
ports are mapped to the RAM Data Memory with specific addresses as shown in the Special Purpose
Data Memory table. All of these I/O ports can be used for input and output operations. For input
operation, these ports are non-latching, which means the inputs must be ready at the T2 rising edge
of instruction “MOV A, [m]”, where m denotes the port address. For output operation, all the data is
latched and remains unchanged until the output latch is rewritten.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PAC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PAPU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PAWU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PB
—
—
—
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PBC
—
—
—
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PBPU
—
—
—
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PC
—
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PCC
—
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PCPU
—
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PD
—
—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PDC
—
—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PDPU
—
—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Note: The I/O lines, PB1~PB4 and PD1, are not connected to the external pins for the HT45FH4N
device.
Pull-high Resistors
Many product applications require pull-high resistors for their switch inputs usually requiring the
use of an external resistor. To eliminate the need for these external resistors, all I/O pins, when
configured as an input have the capability of being connected to an internal pull-high resistor. These
pull-high resistors are selected using registers PAPU~PDPU, and are implemented using weak
PMOS transistors.
PAPU Register
Bit
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0
Rev. 1.10
7
I/O Port A bit7~ bit 0 Pull-High Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
59
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
PBPU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
bit 7 ~ 5
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 4 ~ 0
I/O Port B bit 4~ bit 0 Pull-High Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
PCPU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
bit 7
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 6 ~ 0
I/O Port B bit6~ bit 0 Pull-High Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
PDPU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
—
—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5~0
I/O Port B bit5~ bit 0 Pull-High Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Port A Wake-up
The HALT instruction forces the microcontroller into the SLEEP or IDLE Mode which preserves
power, a feature that is important for battery and other low-power applications. Various methods
exist to wake-up the microcontroller, one of which is to change the logic condition on one of the Port
A pins from high to low. This function is especially suitable for applications that can be woken up
via external switches. Each pin on Port A can be selected individually to have this wake-up feature
using the PAWU register.
PAWU Register
Bit
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0
Rev. 1.10
7
I/O Port A bit 7 ~ bit 0 Wake Up Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
60
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
I/O Port Control Registers
Each I/O port has its own control register known as PAC~PDC, to control the input/output
configuration. With this control register, each CMOS output or input can be reconfigured
dynamically under software control. Each pin of the I/O ports is directly mapped to a bit in its
associated port control register. For the I/O pin to function as an input, the corresponding bit of the
control register must be written as a “1”. This will then allow the logic state of the input pin to be
directly read by instructions. When the corresponding bit of the control register is written as a “0”,
the I/O pin will be setup as a CMOS output. If the pin is currently setup as an output, instructions
can still be used to read the output register. However, it should be noted that the program will in fact
only read the status of the output data latch and not the actual logic status of the output pin.
PAC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
Bit 7 ~ 0
I/O Port A bit 7 ~ bit 0 Input/Output Control
0: Output
1: Input
PBC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
—
—
—
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7~5
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 4~0
I/O Port B bit 4~bit 0 Input/Output Control
0: Output
1: Input
PCC Register
Rev. 1.10
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 6~0
I/O Port C bit 6~bit 0 Input/Output Control
0: Output
1: Input
61
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
PDC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5~0
I/O Port D bit 5~bit 0 Input/Output Control
0: Output
1: Input
As the PB1, PB2 and PD1 are not connected to the external pins, it is recommended to set these pins
as I/O output high or output low via the related I/O port control bits.
Pin-remapping Functions
The flexibility of the microcontroller range is greatly enhanced by the use of pins that have more
than one function. Limited numbers of pins can force serious design constraints on designers but
by supplying pins with multi-functions, many of these difficulties can be overcome. The way in
which the pin function of each pin is selected is different for each function and a priority order is
established where more than one pin function is selected simultaneously. Additionally there is a
PRM register to establish certain pin functions. Generally speaking, the analog function has higher
priority than the digital function. However, if more than two analog functions are enabled and the
analog signal input comes from the same external pin, the analog input will be internally connected
to all of these active analog functional modules.
Pin-remapping Register
The limited number of supplied pins in a package can impose restrictions on the amount of functions
a certain device can contain. However by allowing the same pins to share several different functions
and providing a means of function selection, a wide range of different functions can be incorporated
into even relatively small package sizes. The device includes PRM register which can select the
functions of certain pins.
Rev. 1.10
62
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
PRM Register
Bit
7
Name
—
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OUT1HPRM OUT1LPRM OUT0HPRM OUT0LPRM INT2PRM INT1PRM INT0PRM
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 6OUT1HPRM: OUT1H Pin Remap Control
0: OUT1H on PB2
1: OUT1H on PA4
Bit 5OUT1LPRM: OUT1L Pin Remap Control
0: OUT1L on PB1
1: OUT1L on PB0
Bit 4OUT0HPRM: OUT0H Pin Remap Control
0: OUT0H on PB3
1: OUT0H on PB2
Bit 3OUT0LPRM: OUT0L Pin Remap Control
0: OUT0L on PB4
1: OUT0L on PB1
Bit 2INT2PRM: INT2 Pin Remap Control
0: INT2 on PA7
1: INT2 on PA4
Bit 1INT1PRM: INT1 Pin Remap Control
0: INT1 on PA6
1: INT1 on PA3
Bit 0INT0PRM: INT0 Pin Remap Control
0: INT0 on PA5
1: INT0 on PA2
For the HT45FH4N device care must be taken when the pin-remapping function is used as the
PB1~PB4 I/O lines are not connected to the external pins.
Rev. 1.10
63
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
I/O Pin Structures
The accompanying diagrams illustrate the internal structures of some generic I/O pin types. As
the exact logical construction of the I/O pin will differ from these drawings, they are supplied as a
guide only to assist with the functional understanding of the I/O pins. The wide range of pin-shared
structures does not permit all types to be shown.
 
     Generic Input/Output Structure
 €  
 ­
­
   
A/D Input/Output Structure
Rev. 1.10
64
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programming Considerations
Within the user program, one of the first things to consider is port initialisation. After a reset, all of
the I/O data and port control registers will be set high. This means that all I/O pins will default to
an input state, the level of which depends on the other connected circuitry and whether pull-high
selections have been chosen. If the port control registers, PAC~PDC, are then programmed to setup
some pins as outputs, these output pins will have an initial high output value unless the associated
port data registers, PA~PD, are first programmed. Selecting which pins are inputs and which are
outputs can be achieved byte-wide by loading the correct values into the appropriate port control
register or by programming individual bits in the port control register using the “SET [m].i” and
“CLR [m].i” instructions. Note that when using these bit control instructions, a read-modify-write
operation takes place. The microcontroller must first read in the data on the entire port, modify it to
the required new bit values and then rewrite this data back to the output ports.
Read/Wite Timing
Port A has the additional capability of providing wake-up functions. When the device is in the
SLEEP or IDLE Mode, various methods are available to wake the device up. One of these is a high
to low transition of any of the Port A pins. Single or multiple pins on Port A can be setup to have this
function.
Rev. 1.10
65
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Timer Modules – TM
One of the most fundamental functions in any microcontroller device is the ability to control and
measure time. To implement time related functions the device includes several Timer Modules,
abbreviated to the name TM. The TMs are multi-purpose timing units and serve to provide
operations such as Timer/Counter, Input Capture, Compare Match Output and Single Pulse Output
as well as being the functional unit for the generation of PWM signals. Each of the TMs has two
individual interrupts. The addition of input and output pins for each TM ensures that users are
provided with timing units with a wide and flexible range of features.
The common features of the different TM types are described here with more detailed information
provided in the individual Standard and Periodic TM section.
Introduction
The device contains a 16-bit Standard TM and three 10-bit Periodic TMs, each TM having a
reference name of TM0, TM1, TM2 and TM3. Although similar in nature, the different TM types
vary in their feature complexity. The common features to the Standard and Periodic TMs will be
described in this section and the detailed operation will be described in corresponding sections. The
main features and differences between the two types of TMs are summarised in the accompanying
table.
STM
PTM
Timer/Counter
Function
√
√
I/P Capture
√
√
Compare Match Output
√
√
PWM Channels
1
1
Single Pulse Output
1
1
Edge
Edge
Duty or Period
Duty or Period
PWM Alignment
PWM Adjustment Period & Duty
TM Function Summary
Device
TM0
TM1
TM2
TM3
HT45F4N / HT45FH4N
16-bit STM
10-bit PTM
10-bit PTM
10-bit PTM
TM Name/Type Reference
TM Operation
The two different types of TMs offer a diverse range of functions, from simple timing operations
to PWM signal generation. The key to understanding how the TM operates is to see it in terms of
a free running counter whose value is then compared with the value of pre-programmed internal
comparators. When the free running counter has the same value as the pre-programmed comparator,
known as a compare match situation, a TM interrupt signal will be generated which can clear the
counter and perhaps also change the condition of the TM output pin. The internal TM counter is
driven by a user selectable clock source, which can be an internal clock or an external pin.
TM Clock Source
The clock source which drives the main counter in each TM can originate from various sources.
The selection of the required clock source is implemented using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits in the TM
control registers. The clock source can be a ratio of either the system clock fSYS or the internal high
clock fH, the fTBC clock source or the external TCKn pin. The TCKn pin clock source is used to allow
an external signal to drive the TM as an external clock source or for event counting.
Rev. 1.10
66
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM Interrupts
The two different types of TMs have two internal interrupts, the internal comparator A or comparator
P, which generate a TM interrupt when a compare match condition occurs. When a TM interrupt is
generated, it can be used to clear the counter and also to change the state of the TM output pin. TM External Pins
Each of the TMs, irrespective of what type, has one TM input pin, with the label TCKn. The TM
input pin, is essentially a clock source for the TM and is selected using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits in
the TMnC0 register. This external TM input pin allows an external clock source to drive the internal
TM. This external TM input pin is shared with other functions but will be connected to the internal
TM if selected using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits. The TM input pin can be chosen to have either a
rising or falling active edge.
The TMs each have two output pins. When the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode, these
pins can be controlled by the TM to switch to a high or low level or to toggle when a compare match
situation occurs. The external TPn output pin is also the pin where the TM generates the PWM
output waveform. As the TM output pins are pin-shared with other function, the TM output function
must first be setup using registers. A single bit in one of the registers determines if its associated pin
is to be used as an external TM output pin or if it is to have another function. The number of output
pins for each TM type is different, the details are provided in the accompanying table.
TM output pin names have an “_n” suffix. Pin names that include a “_0” or “_1” suffix indicate
that they are from a TM with multiple output pins. This allows the TM to generate a complimentary
output pair, selected using the I/O register data bits.
Device
TM0
TM1
TM2
TM3
HT45F4N / HT45FH4N
TP0_0, TP0_1
TP1_0, TP1_1
TP2_0, TP2_1
TP3_0, TP3_1
TM Output Pins
TM Input/Output Pin Control Register
Selecting to have a TM input/output or whether to retain its other shared function is implemented
using one register, with a single bit in each register corresponding to a TM input/output pin. Setting
the bit high will setup the corresponding pin as a TM input/output, if reset to zero the pin will retain
its original other function.
Rev. 1.10
67
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM0 Function Pin Control Block Diagram
Note: 1. The I/O register data bits shown are used for TM output inversion control.
2. In the Capture Input Mode, the TM pin control register must never enable more than one
TM input.
Rev. 1.10
68
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
P B 0 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
0
P B 0 /T P 1 _ 0
1
0
1
T 1 C P 0
P B 0
P A 7 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
O u tp u t
0
1
0
1
T 1 C P 1
P A 7
C a p tu re In p u t
1
0
0
1
P A 7 /T P 1 _ 1
T 1 C P 1
T 1 C A P T S
1
0
T 1 C P 0
T C K In p u t
P A 3 /T C K 1
TM1 Function Pin Control Block Diagram
Note: 1. The I/O register data bits shown are used for TM output inversion control.
2. In the Capture Input Mode, the TM pin control register must never enable more than one
TM input.
Rev. 1.10
69
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
P B 0 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
0
P B 0 /T P 2 _ 0
1
0
1
T 2 C P 0
P B 0
P A 6 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
O u tp u t
0
1
0
1
T 2 C P 1
P A 6
C a p tu re In p u t
1
0
0
1
P A 6 /T P 2 _ 1
T 2 C P 1
T 2 C A P T S
1
0
T 2 C P 0
T C K In p u t
P A 2 /T C K 2
TM2 Function Pin Control Block Diagram
Note: 1. The I/O register data bits shown are used for TM output inversion control.
2. In the Capture Input Mode, the TM pin control register must never enable more than one
TM input.
Rev. 1.10
70
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
P B 0 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
0
P B 0 /T P 3 _ 0
1
0
1
T 3 C P 0
P B 0
P A 0 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
O u tp u t
0
1
0
1
T 3 C P 1
P A 0
C a p tu re In p u t
1
0
0
1
P A 0 /T P 3 _ 1
T 3 C P 1
T 3 C A P T S
1
0
T 3 C P 0
T C K In p u t
P A 6 /T C K 3
TM3 Function Pin Control Block Diagram
Note: 1. The I/O register data bits shown are used for TM output inversion control.
2. In the Capture Input Mode, the TM pin control register must never enable more than one
TM input.
Rev. 1.10
71
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TMPC0 Register
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
OUT0LN OUT0HN OUT0CP1 OUT0CP0
3
2
1
0
T1CP1
T1CP0
T0CP1
T0CP0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7OUT0LN: OUT0L signal inverting control
0: Non-inverted
1: Inverted
This bit is used to control whether the OUT0L signal is inverted or not before output.
Bit 6 OUT0HN: OUT0H signal inverting control
0: Non-inverted
1: Inverted
This bit is used to control whether the OUT0H signal is inverted or not before output.
Bit 5 ~ 4OUT0CP[1:0]: OUT0H and OUT0L pin control
00: Normal I/O function, i.e., PB4(or PB1) and PB3(or PB2)
01: PB4(or PB1) and OUT0H
10: OUT0L and PB3(or PB2)
11: OUT0L and OUT0H
If these bits are set to “11”, the dead time circuitry will be automatically enabled.
If these bits are set to a value except “11”, then the dead time circuitry will be
automatically disabled
Note: For the HT45FH4N device care must be taken when the OUT0L and OUT0H
pin functions are used as the PB1 and PB2 lines are not connected to the
external pins and the PB3 and PB4 lines are internally connected to the level
shift input A and C respectively.
Bit 3T1CP1: TP1_1 pin Control
0: TP1_1 pin is disabled
1: TP1_1 pin is enabled
Bit 2T1CP0: TP1_0 pin control
0: TP1_0 pin is disabled
1: TP1_0 pin is enabled
Bit 1T0CP1: TP0_1 pin Control
0: TP0_1 pin is disabled
1: TP0_1 pin is enabled
Bit 0T0CP0: TP0_0 pin Control
0: TP0_0 pin is disabled
1: TP0_0 pin is enabled
Rev. 1.10
72
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TMPC1 Register
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
OUT1LN OUT1HN OUT1CP1 OUT1CP0
3
2
1
0
T3CP1
T3CP0
T2CP1
T2CP0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7OUT1LN: OUT1L signal inverting control
0: Non-inverted
1: Inverted
This bit is used to control whether the OUT1L signal is inverted or not before output.
Bit 6 OUT1HN: OUT1H signal inverting control
0: Non-inverted
1: Inverted
This bit is used to control whether the OUT1H signal is inverted or not before output.
Bit 5 ~ 4OUT1CP[1:0]: OUT1H and OUT1L pin control
00: Normal I/O function, i.e., PB1(or PB0) and PB2(or PA4)
01: PB1(or PB0) and OUT1H
10: OUT1L and PB2(or PA4)
11: OUT1L and OUT1H
If these bits are set to “11”, the dead time circuitry will be automatically enabled.
If these bits are set to a value except “11”, then the dead time circuitry will be
automatically disabled.
Note: For the HT45FH4N device care must be taken when the OUT1L and OUT1H
pin functions are used as the PB1 and PB2 lines are not connected to the
external pins and the PB3 and PB4 lines are internally connected to the level
shift input A and C respectively.
Bit 3T3CP1: TP3_1 pin Control
0: TP3_1 pin is disabled
1: TP3_1 pin is enabled
Bit 2T3CP0: TP3_0 pin control
0: TP3_0 pin is disabled
1: TP3_0 pin is enabled
Bit 1T2CP1: TP2_1 pin Control
0: TP2_1 pin is disabled
1: TP2_1 pin is enabled
Bit 0T2CP0: TP2_0 pin Control
0: TP2_0 pin is disabled
1: TP2_0 pin is enabled
Rev. 1.10
73
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programming Considerations
The TM Counter Registers, the Capture/Compare CCRA and the CCRP registers, being either 16bit or 10-bit, all have a low and high byte structure. The high bytes can be directly accessed, but as
the low bytes can only be accessed via an internal 8-bit buffer, reading or writing to these register
pairs must be carried out in a specific way. The important point to note is that data transfer to and
from the 8-bit buffer and its related low byte only takes place when a write or read operation to its
corresponding high byte is executed. As the CCRA and CCRP registers are implemented in the way
shown in the following diagram and accessing these register pairs is carried out in a specific way
described above, it is recommended to use the “MOV” instruction to access the CCRA or CCRP
low byte registers, named TMxAL or TMxRPL, using the following access procedures. Accessing
the CCRA or CCRP low byte register without following these access procedures will result in
unpredictable values.
T� Counte� Registe� (Read only)
T�xDL
T�xDH
�-bit Buffe�
T�xAL
T�xAH
T� CCRA Registe� (Read/W�ite)
T�xRPL
T�xRPH
T� CCRP Registe� (Read/W�ite)
Data
Bus
The following steps show the read and write procedures:
• Writing Data to CCRA or CCRP
♦♦
Step 1. Write data to Low Byte TMxAL or TMxRPL
––note that here data is only written to the 8-bit buffer.
♦♦
Step 2. Write data to High Byte TMxAH or TMxRPH
–– here data is written directly to the high byte registers and simultaneously data is latched
from the 8-bit buffer to the Low Byte registers.
• Reading Data from the Counter Registers and CCRA or CCRP
Rev. 1.10
♦♦
Step 1. Read data from the High Byte TMxDH, TMxAH or TMxRPH
––here data is read directly from the High Byte registers and simultaneously data is latched
from the Low Byte register into the 8-bit buffer.
♦♦
Step 2. Read data from the Low Byte TMxDL, TMxAL or TMxRPL
––this step reads data from the 8-bit buffer.
74
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Standard Type TM – STM
The Standard Type TM contains five operating modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/
Event Counter, Capture Input, Single Pulse Output and PWM Output modes. The Standard TM
can also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive two external output pins. These two
external output pins can be the same signal or the inverse signal.
Name
TM No.
TM Input Pin
TM Output Pin
16-bit STM
0
TCK0
TP0_0, TP0_1
†‡
ˆ ‡
†‡
‰
ˆ ‡
†Š  †Š  ‰
† ‹ † ‹              
 „

ƒ 
ƒ 
  
  … …     
ƒ 
­ € 
‚   Standard Type TM Block Diagram (n=0)
Standard TM Operation
At its core is a 16-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user selectable internal or external clock
source. There are also two internal comparators with the names, Comparator A and Comparator
P. These comparators will compare the value in the counter with CCRP and CCRA registers. The
CCRP is 8-bits wide whose value is compared with the highest 8 bits in the counter while the CCRA
is the 16 bits and therefore compares with all counter bits.
The only way of changing the value of the 16-bit counter using the application program, is to
clear the counter by changing the T0ON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared
automatically by a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators.
When these conditions occur, a TM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Standard
Type TM can operate in a number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock
sources including an input pin and can also control an output pin. All operating setup conditions are
selected using relevant internal registers.
Rev. 1.10
75
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Standard Type TM Register Description
Overall operation of the Standard TM is controlled using seven registers. A read only register pair
exists to store the internal counter 16-bit value, while a read/write register pair exists to store the
internal 16-bit CCRA value. The remaining two registers are control registers which setup the
different operating and control modes as well as the eight CCRP bits.
Name
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
TM0C0
T0PAU
T0CK2
T0CK1
T0CK0
T0ON
—
—
—
TM0C1
T0M1
T0M0
T0IO1
T0IO0
T0OC
T0POL
T0DPX
T0CCLR
TM0DL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM0DH
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
TM0AL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM0AH
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
TM0RP
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
16-bit Standard TM Register List
TM0C0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T0PAU
T0CK2
T0CK1
T0CK0
T0ON
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
POR
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
Bit 7T0PAU: TM0 Counter Pause Control
0: run
1: pause
The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores
normal counter operation. When in a Pause condition the TM will remain powered up
and continue to consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when this bit
changes from low to high and resume counting from this value when the bit changes
to a low value again.
Bit 6 ~ 4
Rev. 1.10
T0CK2 ~ T0CK0: Select TM0 Counter clock
000: fSYS/4
001: fSYS
010: fH/16
011: fH/64
100: fTBC
101: fTBC
110: TCK0 rising edge clock
111: TCK0 falling edge clock
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the TM. The external pin clock
source can be chosen to be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is
the system clock, while fH and fTBC are other internal clocks, the details of which can
be found in the oscillator section.
76
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 3T0ON: TM0 Counter On/Off Control
0: Off
1: On
This bit controls the overall on/off function of the TM. Setting the bit high enables the
counter to run, clearing the bit disables the TM. Clearing this bit to zero will stop the
counter from counting and turn off the TM which will reduce its power consumption.
When the bit changes state from low to high the internal counter value will be reset to
zero, however when the bit changes from high to low, the internal counter will retain
its residual value until the bit returns high again.
If the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode then the TM output pin will be reset
to its initial condition, as specified by the T0OC bit, when the T0ON bit changes from
low to high.
Bit 2 ~ 0
Unimplemented, read as “0”
TM0C1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T0M1
T0M0
T0IO1
T0IO0
T0OC
T0POL
T0DPX
T0CCLR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6T0M1~T0M0: Select TM0 Operating Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Capture Input Mode
10: PWM Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode
11: Timer/Counter Mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation
the TM should be switched off before any changes are made to the bits. In the Timer/
Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled.
Bit 5 ~ 4T0IO1~T0IO0: Select TM0 output function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode
00: Force inactive state
01: Force active state
10: PWM output
11: Single pulse output
Capture Input Mode
00: Input capture at rising edge of TM capture input pin
01: Input capture at falling edge of TM capture input pin
10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of TM capture input pin
11: Input capture disabled
Timer/counter Mode:
Unused
These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a
certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which
mode the TM is running.
Rev. 1.10
77
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the T0IO1~T0IO0 bits determine how the TM
output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. The
TM output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state
when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the T0IO1~T0IO0 bits
are both zero, then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of the TM
output pin should be setup using the T0OC bit. Note that the output level requested by
the T0IO1~T0IO0 bits must be different from the initial value setup using the T0OC
bit otherwise no change will occur on the TM output pin when a compare match
occurs. After the TM output pin changes state it can be reset to its initial level by
changing the level of the T0ON bit from low to high.
In the PWM Mode, the T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits determine how the TM output pin
changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output
function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values
of the T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits only after the TM has been switched off. Unpredictable
PWM outputs will occur if the T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits are changed when the TM is
running.
Bit 3T0OC: TM0 Output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: initial low
1: initial high
PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon
whether TM is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode/
Single Pulse Output Mode. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In
the Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level of the TM output pin
before a compare match occurs. In the PWM Mode it determines if the PWM signal is
active high or active low.
Bit 2T0POL: TM0 Output polarity Control
0: non-invert
1: invert
This bit controls the polarity of the TM output pin. When the bit is set high the TM
output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the
TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode.
Bit 1T0DPX: TM0 PWM period/duty Control
0: CCRP - period; CCRA - duty
1: CCRP - duty; CCRA - period
This bit, determines which of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used for period and
duty control of the PWM waveform.
Bit 0T0CCLR: Select TM0 Counter clear condition
0: TM Comparatror P match
1: TM Comparatror A match
This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the
Standard TM contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of
which can be selected to clear the internal counter. With the T0CCLR bit set high,
the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from
the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can
only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The T0CCLR bit is not
used in the PWM, Single Pulse or Input Capture Mode.
Rev. 1.10
78
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM0DL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0TM0DL: TM0 Counter Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM 16-bit Counter bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM0DH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0TM0DH: TM0 Counter High Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM 16-bit Counter bit 15 ~ bit 8
TM0AL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0TM0AL: TM0 CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM 16-bit CCRA bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM0AH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0TM0AH: TM0 CCRA High Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM 16-bit CCRA bit 15 ~ bit 8
Rev. 1.10
79
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM0RP Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0TM0RP: TM0 CCRP High Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM0 CCRP 8-bit register, compared with the TM0 Counter bit 15 ~ bit 8. Comparator
P Match Period
0: 65536 TM0 clocks
1~255: 256 × (1~255) TM0 clocks
These eight bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 8-bit register, which
are then compared with the internal counter’s highest eight bits. The result of this
comparison can be selected to clear the internal counter if the T0CCLR bit is set to
zero. Setting the T0CCLR bit to zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP
values will reset the internal counter. As the CCRP bits are only compared with the
highest eight counter bits, the compare values exist in 256 clock cycle multiples.
Clearing all eight bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at its
maximum value.
Standard Type TM Operating Modes
The Standard Type TM can operate in one of five operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode,
PWM Output Mode, Single Pulse Output Mode, Capture Input Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The
operating mode is selected using the T0M1 and T0M0 bits in the TM0C1 register.
Compare Output Mode
To select this mode, bits T0M1 and T0M0 in the TM0C1 register, should be set to 00 respectively.
In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three methods. These are
a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match from Comparator P.
When the T0CCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be cleared. One is when
a compare match from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all zero which allows
the counter to overflow. Here both T0AF and T0PF interrupt request flags for Comparator A and
Comparator P respectively, will both be generated.
If the T0CCLR bit in the TM0C1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the T0AF interrupt request flag will be
generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when
T0CCLR is high no T0PF interrupt request flag will be generated. In the Compare Match Output
Mode, the CCRA can not be set to “0”.
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin, will change
state. The TM output pin condition however only changes state when a T0AF interrupt request flag
is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The T0PF interrupt request flag,
generated from a compare match occurs from Comparator P, will have no effect on the TM output
pin. The way in which the TM output pin changes state are determined by the condition of the
T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits in the TM0C1 register. The TM output pin can be selected using the T0IO1
and T0IO0 bits to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match
occurs from Comparator A. The initial condition of the TM output pin, which is setup after the
T0ON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the T0OC bit. Note that if the T0IO1 and T0IO0
bits are zero then no pin change will take place.
Rev. 1.10
80
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
CCRP = 0
TnCCLR = 0; TnM[1:0] = 00
Counter
overflow
0xFFFF
CCRP > 0
Counter cleared by CCRP value
CCRP > 0
CCRP
Pause
Resume
CCRA
Stop
Counter
Reset
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
Output Pin set
to Initial Level
Low if TnOC = 0
Output Toggle
with TnAF flag
Now TnIO1, TnIO0 = 10
Active High Output
Select
Output not affected by
TnAF flag. Remains High
until reset by TnON bit
Here TnIO1, TnIO0 = 11
Toggle Output Select
Output inverts
when TnPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to initial value
Output controlled
by other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode — TnCCLR=0
Note: 1. With TnCCLR = 0 a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin reset to initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
4. n = 0
Rev. 1.10
81
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TnCCLR = 1; TnM[1:0] = 00
Counter Value
CCRA = 0
Counter overflows
CCRA > 0 Counter cleared by CCRA value
0xFFFF
CCRA = 0
CCRA
Pause
Resume
Stop
CCRP
Counter
Reset
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
No TnAF flag
generated on
CCRA overflow
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TM O/P Pin
Output does
not change
TnPF not
generated
Output Pin set
to Initial Level
Low if TnOC = 0
Output not affected by
TnAF flag remains High
until reset by TnON bit
Output Toggle
with TnAF flag
Now TnIO1, TnIO0 = 10
Active High Output
Select
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Output inverts
when TnPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to initial value
Here TnIO1, TnIO0 = 11
Toggle Output Select
Compare Match Output Mode — TnCCLR=1
Note: 1. With TnCCLR = 1 a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin reset to initial state by a TnON rising edge
4. The TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR = 1
5. n = 0
Rev. 1.10
82
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Timer/Counter Mode
To select this mode, bits T0M1 and T0M0 in the TM0C1 register should be set to 11 respectively.
The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode
generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the TM output
pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare Match
Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this mode,
the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function.
PWM Output Mode
To select this mode, bits T0M1 and T0M0 in the TM0C1 register should be set to 10 respectively
and also the T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits should be set to 10 respectively. The PWM function within
the TM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor control, heating control,
illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of varying duty cycle on the
TM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with varying equivalent DC RMS
values.
As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated
waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM mode, the T0CCLR bit has no effect as the PWM
period. Both of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used to generate the PWM waveform, one register
is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency, while the other
one is used to control the duty cycle. Which register is used to control either frequency or duty cycle
is determined using the T0DPX bit in the TM0C1 register.
The PWM waveform frequency and duty cycle can therefore be controlled by the values in the
CCRA and CCRP registers. An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be
generated when a compare match occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The T0OC bit
In the TM0C1 register is used to select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two
T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits are used to enable the PWM output or to force the TM output pin to a fixed
high or low level. The T0POL bit is used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform.
16-bit STM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, T0DPX=0
CCRP
1~255
0
Period
CCRP×256
65536
Duty
CCRA
If fSYS = 30MHz, TM clock source is fSYS/4, CCRP = 2 and CCRA =128,
The STM PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4) / 512 = fSYS/2048 = 14.65 kHz, duty = 128/512 = 25%.
If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the
PWM output duty is 100%.
16-bit STM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, T0DPX=1
CCRP
1~255
Period
Duty
0
CCRA
CCRP×256
65536
The PWM output period is determined by the CCRA register value together with the TM clock
while the PWM duty cycle is defined by the (CCRP×256) except when the CCRP value is equal to 0.
Rev. 1.10
83
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
TnDPX = 0; Tn� [1:0] = 10
Counte� �lea�ed
by CCRP
Counte� Reset w�en
TnON �etu�ns �ig�
CCRP
Pause Resume
CCRA
Counte� Stop if
TnON bit low
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
T� O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
T� O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PW� Duty Cy�le
set by CCRA
PW� Pe�iod
set by CCRP
PW� �esumes
ope�ation
Output �ont�olled by
Output Inve�ts
ot�e� pin-s�a�ed fun�tion
w�en TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode — TnDPX=0
Note: 1. Here TnDPX = 0 - Counter cleared by CCRP
2. A counter clear sets PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnIO[1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
5. n = 0
Rev. 1.10
84
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
TnDPX = 1; Tn� [1:0] = 10
Counte� �lea�ed
by CCRA
Counte� Reset w�en
TnON �etu�ns �ig�
CCRA
Pause Resume
CCRP
Counte� Stop if
TnON bit low
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
T� O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
T� O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PW� Duty Cy�le
set by CCRP
PW� Pe�iod
set by CCRA
PW� �esumes
ope�ation
Output �ont�olled by
Output Inve�ts
ot�e� pin-s�a�ed fun�tion
w�en TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode — TnDPX=1
Note: 1. Here TnDPX = 1 - Counter cleared by CCRA
2. A counter clear sets PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues even when TnIO[1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
5. n = 0
Rev. 1.10
85
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Single Pulse Output Mode
To select this mode, bits T0M1 and T0M0 in the TM0C1 register should be set to 10 respectively
and also the T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits should be set to 11 respectively. The Single Pulse Output Mode,
as the name suggests, will generate a single shot pulse on the TM output pin.
The trigger for the pulse output leading edge is a low to high transition of the T0ON bit, which can
be implemented using the application program. However in the Single Pulse Mode, the T0ON bit
can also be made to automatically change from low to high using the external TCK0 pin, which will
in turn initiate the Single Pulse output. When the T0ON bit transitions to a high level, the counter
will start running and the pulse leading edge will be generated. The T0ON bit should remain high
when the pulse is in its active state. The generated pulse trailing edge will be generated when the
T0ON bit is cleared to zero, which can be implemented using the application program or when a
compare match occurs from Comparator A.
            Single Pulse Generation (n=0)
Rev. 1.10
86
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
Tn� [1:0] = 10 ; TnIO [1:0] = 11
Counte� stopped
by CCRA
Counte� Reset w�en
TnON �etu�ns �ig�
CCRA
Pause
Counte� Stops
by softwa�e
Resume
CCRP
Time
TnON
Softwa�e
T�igge�
Auto. set by
TCKn pin
Clea�ed by
CCRA mat��
TCKn pin
Softwa�e
T�igge�
Softwa�e
T�igge�
Softwa�e
Clea�
Softwa�e
T�igge�
TCKn pin
T�igge�
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
No CCRP Inte��upts
gene�ated
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
T� O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
T� O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
Output Inve�ts
w�en TnPOL = 1
Pulse Widt�
set by CCRA
Single Pulse Output Mode
Note: 1. Counter stopped by CCRA match
2. CCRP is not used
3. The pulse is triggered by the TCKn pin or setting the TnON bit high
4. A TCKn pin active edge will automatically set the TnON bit high
5. In the Single Pulse Mode, TnIO [1:0] must be set to “11” and can not be changed.
6. n = 0
However a compare match from Comparator A will also automatically clear the T0ON bit and thus
generate the Single Pulse output trailing edge. In this way the CCRA value can be used to control
the pulse width. A compare match from Comparator A will also generate a TM interrupt. The counter
can only be reset back to zero when the T0ON bit changes from low to high when the counter
restarts. In the Single Pulse Mode CCRP is not used. The T0CCLR and T0DPX bits are not used in
this Mode.
Rev. 1.10
87
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Capture Input Mode
To select this mode bits T0M1 and T0M0 in the TM0C1 register should be set to 01 respectively.
This mode enables external signals to capture and store the present value of the internal counter
and can therefore be used for applications such as pulse width measurements. The external signal is
supplied on the TP0_0 or TP0_1 pin, whose active edge can be either a rising edge, a falling edge or
both rising and falling edges; the active edge transition type is selected using the T0IO1 and T0IO0
bits in the TM0C1 register. The counter is started when the T0ON bit changes from low to high
which is initiated using the application program.
When the required edge transition appears on the TP0_0 or TP0_1 pin the present value in the
counter will be latched into the CCRA registers and a TM interrupt generated. Irrespective of what
events occur on the TP0_0 or TP0_1 pin the counter will continue to free run until the TnON bit
changes from high to low. When a CCRP compare match occurs the counter will reset back to zero;
in this way the CCRP value can be used to control the maximum counter value. When a CCRP
compare match occurs from Comparator P, a TM interrupt will also be generated. Counting the
number of overflow interrupt signals from the CCRP can be a useful method in measuring long
pulse widths. The TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits can select the active trigger edge on the TP0_0 or TP0_1
pin to be a rising edge, falling edge or both edge types. If the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are both set
high, then no capture operation will take place irrespective of what happens on the TP0_0 or TP0_1
pin, however it must be noted that the counter will continue to run.
As the TP0_0 or TP0_1 pin is pin shared with other functions, care must be taken if the TM is in the
Input Capture Mode. This is because if the pin is setup as an output, then any transitions on this pin
may cause an input capture operation to be executed. The T0CCLR and T0DPX bits are not used in
this Mode.
Rev. 1.10
88
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
Tn� [1:0] = 01
Counte� �lea�ed
by CCRP
Counte� Counte�
Stop
Reset
CCRP
YY
Pause
Resume
XX
Time
TnON
TnPAU
T� �aptu�e
pin TPn_x
A�tive
edge
A�tive
edge
A�tive edge
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA
Value
TnIO [1:0]
Value
XX
00 – Rising edge
YY
01 – Falling edge
XX
10 – Bot� edges
YY
11 – Disable Captu�e
Capture Input Mode
Note: 1. TnM[1:0] = 01 and active edge set by the TnIO[1:0] bits
2. A TM Capture input pin active edge transfers the counter value to CCRA
3. The TnCCLR bit is not used
4. No output function - TnOC and TnPOL bits are not used
5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when CCRP is equal to
zero.
6. n = 0
Rev. 1.10
89
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Periodic Type TM – PTM
The Periodic Type TM contains five operating modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/
Event Counter, Capture Input, Single Pulse Output and PWM Output modes. The Periodic TM can
also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive one external output pin.
Periodic TM Operation
At its core is a 10-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user selectable internal or external clock
source. There are two internal comparators with the names, Comparator A and Comparator P. These
comparators will compare the value in the counter with the CCRA and CCRP registers.
The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to
clear the counter by changing the TnON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared
automatically by a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators.
When these conditions occur, a TM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Periodic
Type TM can operate in a number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock
sources including an input pin and can also control the output pin. All operating setup conditions are
selected using relevant internal registers.
„…
† …
„…
‡
† …
„ˆ  ‰
„ˆ ‰ ‡
„ Š „ˆ
   
 ‚

€ 
€ 
 
ƒ ƒ   
€ 
ƒ ƒ   ­ …
Periodic Type TM Block Diagram (n=1~3)
Rev. 1.10
90
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Periodic Type TM Register Description
Overall operation of the Periodic TM is controlled using a series of registers. A read only register
pair exists to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while two read/write register pairs exist to store
the internal 10-bit CCRA and CCRP value. The remaining two registers are control registers which
setup the different operating and control modes.
Name
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
TMnC0
TnPAU
TnCK2
TnCK1
TnCK0
TnON
—
—
—
TMnC1
TnM1
TnM0
TnIO1
TnIO0
TnOC
TnPOL
TMnDL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
TMnDH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
TMnAL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TnCAPTS TnCCLR
D0
TMnAH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
TMnRPL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TMnRPH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
10-bit Periodic TM Register List(n=1~3)
TMnC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TnPAU
TnCK2
TnCK1
TnCK0
TnON
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
POR
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
Bit 7TnPAU: TMn Counter Pause Control
0: run
1: pause
The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores
normal counter operation. When in a Pause condition the TM will remain powered up
and continue to consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when this bit
changes from low to high and resume counting from this value when the bit changes
to a low value again.
Bit 6 ~ 4
Rev. 1.10
TnCK2 ~ TnCK0: Select TMn Counter clock
000: fSYS/4
001: fSYS
010: fH/16
011: fH/64
100: fTBC
101: fH
110: TCKn rising edge clock
111: TCKn falling edge clock
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the TM. The external pin clock
source can be chosen to be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is
the system clock, while fH and fTBC are other internal clocks, the details of which can
be found in the oscillator section.
91
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 3TnON: TMn Counter On/Off Control
0: Off
1: On
This bit controls the overall on/off function of the TM. Setting the bit high enables the
counter to run, clearing the bit disables the TM. Clearing this bit to zero will stop the
counter from counting and turn off the TM which will reduce its power consumption.
When the bit changes state from low to high the internal counter value will be reset to
zero, however when the bit changes from high to low, the internal counter will retain
its residual value until the bit returns high again.
If the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode then the TM output pin will be reset
to its initial condition, as specified by the TM Output control bit, when the bit changes
from low to high.
Bit 2 ~ 0
Unimplemented, read as “0”
TMnC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
TnM1
TnM0
TnIO1
TnIO0
TnOC
TnPOL
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TnCAPTS TnCCLR
Bit 7 ~ 6TnM1~TnM0: Select TMn Operation Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Capture Input Mode
10: PWM Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode
11: Timer/Counter Mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation
the TM should be switched off before any changes are made to the TnM1 and TnM0
bits. In the Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled.
Bit 5 ~ 4TnIO1~TnIO0: Select TPn_0, TPn_1 output function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode
00: PWM Output inactive state
01: PWM Output active state
10: PWM output
11: Single pulse output
Capture Input Mode
00: Input capture at rising edge of TPn_0, TPn_1
01: Input capture at falling edge of TPn_0, TPn_1
10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of TPn_0, TPn_1
11: Input capture disabled
Timer/counter Mode
Unused
These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a
certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which
mode the TM is running.
Rev. 1.10
92
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits determine how the
TM output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
The TM output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state
when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When these bits are both zero,
then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of the TM output pin
should be setup using the TnOC bit. Note that the output level requested by the TnIO1
and TnIO0 bits must be different from the initial value setup using the TnOC bit
otherwise no change will occur on the TM output pin when a compare match occurs.
After the TM output pin changes state it can be reset to its initial level by changing the
level of the TnON bit from low to high.
In the PWM Mode, the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits determine how the TM output pin
changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output
function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values
of the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits only after the TM has been switched off. Unpredictable
PWM outputs will occur if the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are changed when the TM is
running.
Bit 3TnOC: TPn_0, TPn_1 Output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: initial low
1: initial high
PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon
whether TM is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode/
Single Pulse Output Mode. It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In
the Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level of the TM output pin
before a compare match occurs. In the PWM Mode it determines if the PWM signal is
active high or active low.
Bit 2TnPOL: TPn_0, TPn_1 Output polarity Control
0: non-invert
1: invert
This bit controls the polarity of the TPn_0, TPn_1 output pin. When the bit is set high
the TM output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no
effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode.
Bit 1TnCAPTS: TMn capture trigger source select
0: From TPn_0, TPn_1 pin
1: From TCKn pin
Bit 0TnCCLR: Select TMn Counter clear condition
0: TMn Comparatror P match
1: TMn Comparatror A match
This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the
Periodic TM contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of
which can be selected to clear the internal counter. With the TnCCLR bit set high,
the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from
the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can
only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The TnCCLR bit is not
used in the PWM, Single Pulse or Input Capture Mode.
Rev. 1.10
93
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TMnDL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0TMnDL: TMn Counter Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TMn 10-bit Counter bit 7 ~ bit 0
TMnDH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
2
1
0
Bit 7 ~ 2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1 ~ 0TMnDH: TMn Counter High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
TMn 10-bit Counter bit 9 ~ bit 8
TMnAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0TMnAL: TMn CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TMn 10-bit CCRA bit 7 ~ bit 0
TMnAH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
2
1
0
Bit 7 ~ 2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1 ~ 0TMnAH: TMn CCRA High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
TMn 10-bit CCRA bit 9 ~ bit 8
TMnRPL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0TMnRPL: TMn CCRP Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TMn 10-bit CCRP bit 7 ~ bit 0
Rev. 1.10
94
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TMnRPH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1 ~ 0TMnRPH: TMn CCRP High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
TMn 10-bit CCRP bit 9 ~ bit 8
Periodic Type TM Operating Modes
The Periodic Type TM can operate in one of five operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode,
PWM Output Mode, Single Pulse Output Mode, Capture Input Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The
operating mode is selected using the TnM1 and TnM0 bits in the TMnC1 register.
Compare Match Output Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register, should be all cleared to 00
respectively. In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three
methods. These are a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match
from Comparator P. When the TnCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be
cleared. One is when a compare match occurs from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits
are all zero which allows the counter to overflow. Here both the TnAF and TnPF interrupt request
flags for Comparator A and Comparator P respectively, will both be generated.
If the TnCCLR bit in the TMnC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the TnAF interrupt request flag will be
generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when
TnCCLR is high no TnPF interrupt request flag will be generated. In the Compare Match Output
Mode, the CCRA can not be set to “0”.
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin, will change
state. The TM output pin condition however only changes state when a TnAF interrupt request flag
is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The TnPF interrupt request flag,
generated from a compare match from Comparator P, will have no effect on the TM output pin. The
way in which the TM output pin changes state are determined by the condition of the TnIO1 and
TnIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register. The TM output pin can be selected using the TnIO1 and TnIO0
bits to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match occurs from
Comparator A. The initial condition of the TM output pin, which is setup after the TnON bit changes
from low to high, is setup using the TnOC bit. Note that if the TnIO1, TnIO0 bits are zero then no
pin change will take place.
Rev. 1.10
95
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
Counter overflow
CCRP=0
0x3FF
TnCCLR = 0; TnM [1:0] = 00
CCRP > 0
Counter cleared by CCRP value
CCRP > 0
Counter
Restart
Resume
CCRP
Pause
CCRA
Stop
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if TnOC=0
Output not affected by TnAF
flag. Remains High until reset
by TnON bit
Output Toggle with
TnAF flag
Here TnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note TnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when TnPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode – TnCCLR = 0
Note: 1. With TnCCLR = 0 — a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
4. n=1~3
Rev. 1.10
96
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
TnCCLR = 1; TnM [1:0] = 00
CCRA = 0
Counter overflow
CCRA > 0 Counter cleared by CCRA value
0x3FF
CCRA=0
Resume
CCRA
Pause
Stop
Counter Restart
CCRP
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
No TnAF flag
generated on
CCRA overflow
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TnPF not
generated
Output does
not change
TM O/P Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if TnOC=0
Output not affected by
TnAF flag. Remains High
until reset by TnON bit
Output Toggle with
TnAF flag
Here TnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note TnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when TnPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode – TnCCLR = 1
Note: 1. With TnCCLR = 1 — a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to initial state by a TnON rising edge
4. The TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR = 1
5. n=1~3
Rev. 1.10
97
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Timer/Counter Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should all be set to 11 respectively.
The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode
generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the TM output
pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare Match
Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this mode,
the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function.
PWM Output Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 10 respectively
and also the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits should be set to 10 respectively. The PWM function within
the TM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor control, heating control,
illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of varying duty cycle on the
TM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with varying equivalent DC RMS
values.
As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated
waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM mode, the TnCCLR bit has no effect as the PWM
period. Both of the CCRP and CCRA registers are used to generate the PWM waveform, one register
is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency, while the other
one is used to control the duty cycle. The PWM waveform frequency and duty cycle can therefore
be controlled by the values in the CCRA and CCRP registers.
An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match
occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The TnOC bit in the TMnC1 register is used to
select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are used to
enable the PWM output or to force the TM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The TnPOL bit is
used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform.
10-bit PTM, PWM Mode
CCRP
1~1023
0
Period
1~1023
1024
Duty
CCRA
If fH = 30MHz, TM clock source select fH, CCRP = 200 and CCRA = 50,
The PTM PWM output frequency = (fH) / 200 = 30MHz/200 = 150 kHz, duty = 50/200 = 25%
If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the
PWM output duty is 100%.
Rev. 1.10
98
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counte� Value
TnDPX=0; Tn� [1:0] = 10
Counte� �lea�ed
by CCRP
Counte� Reset w�en
TnON �etu�ns �ig�
CCRP
Pause Resume
CCRA
Counte� Stop if
TnON bit low
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
T� O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
T� O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PW� Duty Cy�le
set by CCRA
PW� Pe�iod
set by CCRP
PW� �esumes
ope�ation
Output �ont�olled by
Output Inve�ts
ot�e� pin-s�a�ed fun�tion
w�en TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode
Note: 1. Here Counter cleared by CCRP
2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnIO[1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
5. n=1~3
Rev. 1.10
99
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Single Pulse Output Mode
To select this mode, the required bit pairs, TnM1 and TnM0 should be set to 10 respectively and also
the corresponding TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits should be set to 11 respectively. The Single Pulse Output
Mode, as the name suggests, will generate a single shot pulse on the TM output pin.
The trigger for the pulse output leading edge is a low to high transition of the TnON bit, which can
be implemented using the application program. However in the Single Pulse Mode, the TnON bit
can also be made to automatically change from low to high using the external TCKn pin, which will
in turn initiate the Single Pulse output. When the TnON bit transitions to a high level, the counter
will start running and the pulse leading edge will be generated. The TnON bit should remain high
when the pulse is in its active state. The generated pulse trailing edge will be generated when the
TnON bit is cleared to zero, which can be implemented using the application program or when a
compare match occurs from Comparator A.
However a compare match from Comparator A will also automatically clear the TnON bit and thus
generate the Single Pulse output trailing edge. In this way the CCRA value can be used to control the
pulse width. A compare match from Comparator A will also generate TM interrupts. The counter can
only be reset back to zero when the TnON bit changes from low to high when the counter restarts. In
the Single Pulse Mode CCRP is not used. The TnCCLR bit is also not used.
            Single Pulse Generation (n=1~3)
Rev. 1.10
100
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
TnM [1:0] = 10 ; TnIO [1:0] = 11
Counter stopped
by CCRA
Counter Reset when
TnON returns high
CCRA
Pause
Counter Stops
by software
Resume
CCRP
Time
TnON
Software
Trigger
Auto. set by
TCKn pin
Cleared by
CCRA match
TCKn pin
Software
Trigger
Software
Trigger
Software
Software Trigger
Clear
TCKn pin
Trigger
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
No CCRP Interrupts
generated
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
Output Inverts
when TnPOL = 1
Pulse Width
set by CCRA
Single Pulse Output Mode
Note: 1. Counter stopped by CCRA
2. CCRP is not used
3. The pulse is triggered by the TCKn pin or by setting the TnON bit high
4. A TCKn pin active edge will automatically set the TnON bit high
5. In the Single Pulse Mode, TnIO [1:0] must be set to “11” and can not be changed.
6. n=1~3
Rev. 1.10
101
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Capture Input Mode
To select this mode bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 01 respectively.
This mode enables external signals to capture and store the present value of the internal counter
and can therefore be used for applications such as pulse width measurements. The external signal
is supplied on the TPn_0, TPn_1or TCKn pin, selected by the TnCAPTS bit in the TMnC0 register.
The input pin active edge can be either a rising edge, a falling edge or both rising and falling edges;
the active edge transition type is selected using the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register.
The counter is started when the TnON bit changes from low to high which is initiated using the
application program.
When the required edge transition appears on the TPn_0, TPn_1 or TCKn pin the present value in
the counter will be latched into the CCRA register and a TM interrupt generated. Irrespective of
what events occur on the TPn_0, TPn_1or TCKn pin the counter will continue to free run until the
TnON bit changes from high to low. When a CCRP compare match occurs the counter will reset
back to zero; in this way the CCRP value can be used to control the maximum counter value. When
a CCRP compare match occurs from Comparator P, a TM interrupt will also be generated. Counting
the number of overflow interrupt signals from the CCRP can be a useful method in measuring long
pulse widths. The TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits can select the active trigger edge on the TPn_0, TPn_1
or TCKn pin to be a rising edge, falling edge or both edge types. If the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are
both set high, then no capture operation will take place irrespective of what happens on the TPn_0,
TPn_1 or TCKn pin, however it must be noted that the counter will continue to run.
As the TPn_0, TPn_1 or TCKn pin is pin shared with other functions, care must be taken if the TMn
is in the Capture Input Mode. This is because if the pin is setup as an output, then any transitions on
this pin may cause an input capture operation to be executed. The TnCCLR, TnOC and TnPOL bits
are not used in this Mode.
Rev. 1.10
102
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
TnM [1:0] = 01
Counter cleared
by CCRP
Counter Counter
Reset
Stop
CCRP
YY
Pause
Resume
XX
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TM capture
pin TPn_x
or TCKn
Active
edge
Active
edge
Active edge
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA
Value
TnIO [1:0]
Value
XX
00 – Rising edge
YY
01 – Falling edge
XX
10 – Both edges
YY
11 – Disable Capture
Capture Input Mode
Note: 1. TnM[1:0] = 01 and active edge set by the TnIO[1:0] bits
2. A TM Capture input pin active edge transfers counter value to CCRA
3. The TnCCLR bit is not used
4. No output function – TnOC and TnPOL bits are not used
5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when CCRP is equal to
zero
6. n=1~3
Rev. 1.10
103
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Analog to Digital Converter
The need to interface to real world analog signals is a common requirement for many electronic
systems. However, to properly process these signals by a microcontroller, they must first be
converted into digital signals by A/D converters. By integrating the A/D conversion electronic
circuitry into the microcontroller, the need for external components is reduced significantly with the
corresponding follow-on benefits of lower costs and reduced component space requirements.
A/D Overview
The device contains a multi-channel analog to digital converter which can directly interface to
external analog signals, such as that from sensors or other control signals and convert these signals
directly into a 12-bit digital value.
Device
Input Channels
A/D Channel Select Bits
Input Pins
HT45F4N
14
ACS4~ACS0
AN0~AN13
HT45FH4N
13
ACS4~ACS0
AN0~AN8, AN10~AN13
Note: The AN9 input is not connected to the external pin for the HT45FH4N device.
External Input Channels
The accompanying block diagram shows the overall internal structure of the A/D converter, together
with its associated registers.
    … †  ‡ ˆ
ƒ
 
  
 € ‚ ­   
  „   
Note: The AN9 pin is only internally used and is not connected to the external pin.
A/D Converter Structure
Rev. 1.10
104
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
A/D Converter Register Description
Overall operation of the A/D converter is controlled using five registers. A read only register pair
exists to store the ADC data 12-bit value. The remaining three registers are control registers which
setup the operating and control function of the A/D converter.
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADRL(ADRFS=0)
D3
D2
D1
D0
—
—
—
—
ADRL(ADRFS=1)
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
ADRH(ADRFS=0)
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
ADRH(ADRFS=1)
—
—
—
—
D11
D10
D9
D8
ADCR0
START
EOCB
ADOFF
ADRFS
ACS3
ACS2
ACS1
ACS0
ADCR1
ACS4
VBGEN
—
VREFS
—
ADCK2
ADCK1
ADCK0
ACERL
ACE7
ACE6
ACE5
ACE4
ACE3
ACE2
ACE1
ACE0
ACERH
—
—
ACE13
ACE12
ACE11
ACE10
ACE9
ACE8
A/D Converter Register List
A/D Converter Data Registers – ADRL, ADRH
As the device contains an internal 12-bit A/D converter, it requires two data registers to store the
converted value. These are a high byte register, known as ADRH, and a low byte register, known
as ADRL. After the conversion process takes place, these registers can be directly read by the
microcontroller to obtain the digitised conversion value. As only 12 bits of the 16-bit register space
is utilised, the format in which the data is stored is controlled by the ADRFS bit in the ADCR0
register as shown in the accompanying table. D0~D11 are the A/D conversion result data bits. Any
unused bits will be read as zero.
ADRFS
ADRH
7
6
5
4
3
0
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
1
0
0
0
0
D11
ADRL
2
1
0
7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D10
D9
D8
D7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D2
D1
D0
0
0
0
0
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A/D Data Registers
A/D Converter Control Registers – ADCR0, ADCR1, ACERL, ACERH
To control the function and operation of the A/D converter, three control registers known as
ADCR0, ADCR1, ACERL and ACERH are provided. These 8-bit registers define functions such
as the selection of which analog channel is connected to the internal A/D converter, the digitised
data format, the A/D clock source as well as controlling the start function and monitoring the A/D
converter end of conversion status. The ACS3~ACS0 bits in the ADCR0 register and ACS4 bit is
the ADCR1 register define the ADC input channel number. As the device contains only one actual
analog to digital converter hardware circuit, each of the individual 14 analog inputs must be routed
to the converter. It is the function of the ACS4 ~ ACS0 bits to determine which analog channel input
signals or internal 1.25V is actually connected to the internal A/D converter.
The ACERL and ACERH control registers contain the ACER13~ACER0 bits which determine
which pins on Port A are used as analog inputs for the A/D converter input and which pins are not
to be used as the A/D converter input. Setting the corresponding bit high will select the A/D input
function, clearing the bit to zero will select either the I/O or other pin-shared function. When the
pin is selected to be an A/D input, its original function whether it is an I/O or other pin-shared
function will be removed. In addition, any internal pull-high resistors connected to these pins will be
automatically removed if the pin is selected to be an A/D input.
Rev. 1.10
105
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
ADCR0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
START
EOCB
ADOFF
ADRFS
ACS3
ACS2
ACS1
ACS0
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7START: Start the A/D conversion
0→1→0: start
0→1: reset the A/D converter and set EOCB to “1”
This bit is used to initiate an A/D conversion process. The bit is normally low but if set
high and then cleared low again, the A/D converter will initiate a conversion process.
When the bit is set high the A/D converter will be reset.
Bit 6EOCB: End of A/D conversion flag
0: A/D conversion ended
1: A/D conversion in progress
This read only flag is used to indicate when an A/D conversion process has completed.
When the conversion process is running the bit will be high.
Bit 5ADOFF : ADC module power on/off control bit
0: ADC module power on
1: ADC module power off
This bit controls the power to the A/D internal function. This bit should be cleared
to zero to enable the A/D converter. If the bit is set high then the A/D converter will
be switched off reducing the device power consumption. As the A/D converter will
consume a limited amount of power, even when not executing a conversion, this may
be an important consideration in power sensitive battery powered applications.
Note: 1. it is recommended to set ADOFF=1 before entering IDLE/SLEEP Mode for
saving power.
2. ADOFF=1 will power down the ADC module.
Bit 4ADRFS: ADC Data Format Control
0: ADC Data MSB is ADRH bit 7, LSB is ADRL bit 4
1: ADC Data MSB is ADRH bit 3, LSB is ADRL bit 0
This bit controls the format of the 12-bit converted A/D value in the two A/D data
registers. Details are provided in the A/D data register section.
Bit 3 ~ 0
Rev. 1.10
ACS3 ~ ACS0: Select A/D channel (when ACS4 is “0”)
0000: AN0
0001: AN1
0010: AN2
0011: AN3
0100: AN4
0101: AN5
0110: AN6
0111: AN7
1000: AN8
1001: AN9 – only available for the HT45F4N device
1010: AN10
1011: AN11
1100: AN12
1101: AN13
1110: AN14 ( from OPA output for OCP 0 )
1111: AN15 ( from OPA output for OCP 1 )
These are the A/D channel select control bits. As there is only one internal hardware
A/D converter each of the eight A/D inputs must be routed to the internal converter
using these bits. If bit ACS4 in the ADCR1 register is set high then the internal 1.25V
will be routed to the A/D Converter.
106
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
ADCR1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
ACS4
VBGEN
—
VREFS
—
ADCK2
ADCK1
ADCK0
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
—
0
—
0
0
0
Bit 7ACS4: Select Internal 1.25V as ADC input Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit enables 1.25V to be connected to the A/D converter. The VBGEN bit must
first have been set to enable the bandgap circuit 1.25V voltage to be used by the A/D
converter. When the ACS4 bit is set high, the bandgap 1.25V voltage will be routed to
the A/D converter and the other A/D input channels disconnected.
Bit 6VBGEN: Internal 1.25V Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit controls the internal Bandgap circuit on/off function to the A/D converter.
When the bit is set high the bandgap 1.25V voltage can be used by the A/D converter.
If 1.25V is not used by the A/D converter and the LVR/LVD function is disabled then
the bandgap reference circuit will be automatically switched off to conserve power.
When 1.25V is switched on for use by the A/D converter, a time tBG should be allowed
for the bandgap circuit to stabilise before implementing an A/D conversion.
Bit 5
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 4VREFS: Select ADC reference voltage
0: Internal ADC power
1: VREF pin
This bit is used to select the reference voltage for the A/D converter. If the bit is high
then the A/D converter reference voltage is supplied on the external VREF pin. If the
pin is low then the internal reference is used which is taken from the power supply pin
VDD.
Rev. 1.10
Bit 3
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2 ~ 0
ADCK2 ~ ADCK0: Select ADC clock source
000: fSYS
001: fSYS/2
010: fSYS/4
011: fSYS/8
100: fSYS/16
101: fSYS/32
110: fSYS/64
111: Undefined
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the A/D converter.
107
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
ACERL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
ACE7
ACE6
ACE5
ACE4
ACE3
ACE2
ACE1
ACE0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7ACE7: Define PC2 is OUVP02, A/D input or not
0: Not OUVP02 and not A/D input
1:OUVP02 or (and) A/D input, AN7
Bit 6ACE6: Define PC1 is OUVP01, A/D input or not
0: Not OUVP01 and not A/D input
1: OUVP01 or (and) A/D input, AN6
Bit 5ACE5: Define PC0 is OUVP00, A/D input or not
0: Not OUVP00 and not A/D input
1: OUVP00 or (and) A/D input, AN5
Bit 4ACE4: Define PA7 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN4
Bit 3ACE3: Define PA6 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN3
Bit 2ACE2: Define PA2 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN2
Bit 1ACE1: Define PA1 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN1
Bit 0ACE0: Define PA0 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN0
Rev. 1.10
108
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
ACERH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
ACE13
ACE12
ACE11
ACE10
ACE9
ACE8
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5ACE13: Define PD5 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN13
Bit 4ACE12: Define PD4 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN12
Bit 3ACE11: Define PD3 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN11
Bit 2ACE10: Define PD2 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN10
Bit 1ACE9: Define PD1 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN9
Note that the AN9 is not connected to the external pin for the HT45FH4N device.
Bit 0ACE8: Define PD0 is A/D input or not
0: Not A/D input
1: A/D input, AN8
Rev. 1.10
109
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
A/D Operation
The START bit in the ADCR0 register is used to start and reset the A/D converter. When the
microcontroller sets this bit from low to high and then low again, an analog to digital conversion
cycle will be initiated. When the START bit is brought from low to high but not low again, the
EOCB bit in the ADCR0 register will be set high and the analog to digital converter will be reset.
It is the START bit that is used to control the overall start operation of the internal analog to digital
converter.
The EOCB bit in the ADCR0 register is used to indicate when the analog to digital conversion
process is complete. This bit will be automatically cleared to “0” by the microcontroller after a
conversion cycle has ended. In addition, the corresponding A/D interrupt request flag will be set
in the interrupt control register, and if the interrupts are enabled, an appropriate internal interrupt
signal will be generated. This A/D internal interrupt signal will direct the program flow to the
associated A/D internal interrupt address for processing. If the A/D internal interrupt is disabled,
the microcontroller can be used to poll the EOCB bit in the ADCR0 register to check whether it has
been cleared as an alternative method of detecting the end of an A/D conversion cycle.
The clock source for the A/D converter, which originates from the system clock fSYS, can be chosen
to be either fSYS or a subdivided version of fSYS. The division ratio value is determined by the
ADCK2~ADCK0 bits in the ADCR1 register.
Although the A/D clock source is determined by the system clock fSYS, and by bits ADCK2~ADCK0,
there are some limitations on the maximum A/D clock source speed that can be selected. As the
recommended range of permissible A/D clock period, tADCK, is from 0.5μs to 10μs, care must be
taken for system clock frequencies. For example, if the system clock operates at a frequency of
4MHz, the ADCK2~ADCK0 bits should not be set to 000B or 110B. Doing so will give A/D clock
periods that are less than the minimum A/D clock period or greater than the maximum A/D clock
period which may result in inaccurate A/D conversion values.
Refer to the following table for examples, where values marked with an asterisk * show where,
depending upon the device, special care must be taken, as the values may be less than the specified
minimum A/D Clock Period.
A/D Clock Period (tADCK)
fSYS
ADCK2,
ADCK1,
ADCK0
=000
(fSYS)
ADCK2,
ADCK1,
ADCK0
=001
(fSYS/2)
ADCK2,
ADCK1,
ADCK0
=010
(fSYS/4)
ADCK2,
ADCK1,
ADCK0
=011
(fSYS/8)
ADCK2,
ADCK1,
ADCK0
=100
(fSYS/16)
ADCK2,
ADCK1,
ADCK0
=101
(fSYS/32)
ADCK2,
ADCK1,
ADCK0
=110
(fSYS/64)
ADCK2,
ADCK1,
ADCK0
=111
1MHz
1μs
2μs
4μs
8μs
16μs*
32μs*
64μs*
Undefined
2MHz
500ns
1μs
2μs
4μs
8μs
16μs*
32μs*
Undefined
4MHz
250ns*
500ns
1μs
2μs
4μs
8μs
16μs*
Undefined
8MHz
125ns*
250ns*
500ns
1μs
2μs
4μs
8μs
Undefined
12MHz
83ns*
167ns*
333ns*
667ns
1.33μs
2.67μs
5.33μs
Undefined
A/D Clock Period Examples
Rev. 1.10
110
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Controlling the power on/off function of the A/D converter circuitry is implemented using the
ADOFF bit in the ADCR0 register. This bit must be zero to power on the A/D converter. When
the ADOFF bit is cleared to zero to power on the A/D converter internal circuitry a certain delay,
as indicated in the timing diagram, must be allowed before an A/D conversion is initiated. Even if
no pins are selected for use as A/D inputs by clearing the ACE13~ACE0 bits in the ACERL and
ACERH registers, if the ADOFF bit is zero then some power will still be consumed. In power
conscious applications it is therefore recommended that the ADOFF is set high to reduce power
consumption when the A/D converter function is not being used.
The reference voltage supply to the A/D Converter can be supplied from either the positive power
supply pin, VDD, or from an external reference sources supplied on pin VREF. The desired selection
is made using the VREFS bit. As the VREF pin is pin-shared with other functions, when the VREFS
bit is set high, the VREF pin function will be selected and the other pin functions will be disabled
automatically.
A/D Input Pins
All of the A/D analog input pins are pin-shared with the I/O pins as well as other functions. The
ACE13~ACE0 bits in the ACERL and ACERH registers, determine whether the input pins are
setup as A/D converter analog inputs or whether they have other functions. If the ACE13~ACE0
bits for its corresponding pin is set high then the pin will be setup to be an A/D converter input
and the original pin functions disabled. In this way, pins can be changed under program control to
change their function between A/D inputs and other functions. All pull-high resistors, which are
setup through register programming, will be automatically disconnected if the pins are setup as A/
D inputs. Note that it is not necessary to first setup the A/D pin as an input in the PAC port control
register to enable the A/D input as when the ACE13~ACE0 bits enable an A/D input, the status of
the port control register will be overridden. Note that the A/D input, AN9, is not connected to the
external pin for the HT45FH4N device.
The A/D converter has its own reference voltage pin, VREF, however the reference voltage can
also be supplied from the power supply pin, a choice which is made through the VREFS bit in the
ADCR1 register. The analog input values must not be allowed to exceed the value of VREF.

­        A/D Input Structure
Rev. 1.10
111
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Summary of A/D Conversion Steps
The following summarises the individual steps that should be executed in order to implement an A/
D conversion process.
• Step 1
Select the required A/D conversion clock by correctly programming bits ADCK2~ADCK0 in the
ADCR1 register.
• Step 2
Enable the A/D by clearing the ADOFF bit in the ADCR0 register to zero.
• Step 3
Select which channel is to be connected to the internal A/D converter by correctly programming
the ACS4~ACS0 bits which are also contained in the ADCR1 and ADCR0 register.
• Step 4
Select which pins are to be used as A/D inputs and configure them by correctly programming the
ACE13~ACE0 bits in the ACERL and ACERH register.
• Step 5
If the interrupts are to be used, the interrupt control registers must be correctly configured to
ensure the A/D converter interrupt function is active. The master interrupt control bit, EMI, and
the A/D converter interrupt bit, ADE, must both be set high to do this.
• Step 6
The analog to digital conversion process can now be initialised by setting the START bit in
the ADCR0 register from low to high and then low again. Note that this bit should have been
originally cleared to zero.
• Step 7
To check when the analog to digital conversion process is complete, the EOCB bit in the ADCR0
register can be polled. The conversion process is complete when this bit goes low. When this
occurs the A/D data registers ADRL and ADRH can be read to obtain the conversion value. As an
alternative method, if the interrupts are enabled and the stack is not full, the program can wait for
an A/D interrupt to occur.
Note: When checking for the end of the conversion process, if the method of polling the EOCB
bit in the ADCR0 register is used, the interrupt enable step above can be omitted.
The accompanying diagram shows graphically the various stages involved in an analog to digital
conversion process and its associated timing. After an A/D conversion process has been initiated
by the application program, the microcontroller internal hardware will begin to carry out the
conversion, during which time the program can continue with other functions. The time taken for the
A/D conversion is 16 tADCK where tADCK is equal to the A/D clock period.
Rev. 1.10
112
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
€ €
‚  
­
­                        
A/D Conversion Timing
Programming Considerations
During microcontroller operations where the A/D converter is not being used, the A/D internal
circuitry can be switched off to reduce power consumption, by setting bit ADOFF high in the
ADCR0 register. When this happens, the internal A/D converter circuits will not consume power
irrespective of what analog voltage is applied to their input lines. If the A/D converter input lines are
used as normal I/Os, then care must be taken as if the input voltage is not at a valid logic level, then
this may lead to some increase in power consumption.
A/D Transfer Function
As the device contains a 12-bit A/D converter, its full-scale converted digitised value is equal to
FFFH. Since the full-scale analog input value is equal to the VDD or VREF voltage, this gives a single
bit analog input value of VDD or VREF divided by 4096.
1 LSB= (VDD or VREF) / 4096
The A/D Converter input voltage value can be calculated using the following equation:
A/D input voltage = A/D output digital value × (VDD or VREF) / 4096
The diagram shows the ideal transfer function between the analog input value and the digitised
output value for the A/D converter. Except for the digitised zero value, the subsequent digitised
values will change at a point 0.5 LSB below where they would change without the offset, and the
last full scale digitised value will change at a point 1.5 LSB below the VDD or VREF level.
    
 
      Ideal A/D Transfer Function
Rev. 1.10
113
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
A/D Programming Examples
The following two programming examples illustrate how to setup and implement an A/D conversion.
In the first example, the method of polling the EOCB bit in the ADCR0 register is used to detect
when the conversion cycle is complete, whereas in the second example, the A/D interrupt is used to
determine when the conversion is complete.
Example: using an EOCB polling method to detect the end of conversion
clr ADE ;
mova,03H
mov ADCR1,a ;
clr ADOFF
mova,0Fh;
mov ACERL,a
mov a, 00h
mov ACERH, a
mova,01h
mov ADCR0,a ;
:
start_conversion:
clr START ;
set START ;
clr START ;
polling_EOC:
sz EOCB ;
jmp polling_EOC ;
mov a,ADRL ;
mov ADRL_buffer,a ;
mov a,ADRH ;
mov ADRH_buffer,a ;
:
:
jmp start_conversion ;
Rev. 1.10
disable ADC interrupt
select fSYS/8 as A/D clock and switch off 1.25V
setup ACERL to configure pins AN0~AN3
enable and connect AN0 channel to A/D converter
high pulse on start bit to initiate conversion
reset A/D
start A/D
poll the ADCR0 register EOCB bit to detect end of A/D conversion
continue polling
read low byte conversion result value
save result to user defined register
read high byte conversion result value
save result to user defined register
start next a/d conversion
114
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Example: using the interrupt method to detect the end of conversion
clr ADE ;
mova,03H
mov ADCR1,a ;
Clr ADOFF
mova,0Fh ;
mov ACERL,a
mov a, 00h
mov ACERH, a
mova,01h
mov ADCR0,a ;
Start_conversion:
clr START ;
set START ;
clr START ;
clrADF ;
set ADE ;
set EMI ;
:
:
;
ADC_ISR:
mov acc_stack,a ;
mov a,STATUS
mov status_stack,a ;
:
:
mov a,ADRL ;
mov adrl_buffer,a ;
mov a,ADRH ;
mov adrh_buffer,a ;
:
:
EXIT_INT_ISR:
mov a,status_stack
mov STATUS,a ;
mov a,acc_stack ;
reti
Rev. 1.10
disable ADC interrupt
select fSYS/8 as A/D clock and switch off 1.25V
setup ACERL to configure pins AN0~AN3
enable and connect AN0 channel to A/D converter
high pulse on START bit to initiate conversion
reset A/D
start A/D
clear ADC interrupt request flag
enable ADC interrupt
enable global interrupt
ADC interrupt service routine
save ACC to user defined memory
save STATUS to user defined memory
read
save
read
save
low byte conversion result value
result to user defined register
high byte conversion result value
result to user defined register
restore STATUS from user defined memory
restore ACC from user defined memory
115
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Complementary PWM Output
The device provides a complementary output pair of signals which can be used as a PWM driver
signal. The signal is sourced from the TM1 output signal, TP1 or the TM2 output signal, TP2. For
PMOS type upper side driving, the PWM output is an active low signal while for NMOS type lower
side driving the PWM output is an active high signal. When these complementary PWM outputs are
both used to drive the upper and low sides, the dead time generator will automatically be enabled
and a dead time, which is programmable using the DTPSCn and DTn bits in the CPRn register,
will be inserted to prevent excessive DC currents. The dead time will be inserted whenever the
rising edge of the dead time generator input signal occurs. With a dead time insertion, the output
signals are eventually sent out to the external power transistors. The dead time generator will only
be enabled if both of the complementary outputs are used, as determined by the OUTnCP bits in the
TMPC register.
B
fH
C
A
TP1 or TP2
Prescaler
Dead Time
Generator
E
fD
D
PWMnH
(driving upper side PMOS, active low)
PWMnL
(driving lower side NMOS, active high)
DTPSCn [1:0] DTn [2:0] OUTnCP [1:0]
Complementary PWM Output Block Diagram
TP1 or TP2
A
B
C
D
E
Dead Time
Dead Time
Dead Time
Dead Time
Dead Time
Dead Time
Complementary PWM Output Waveform
Rev. 1.10
116
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
CPR0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
Name
—
—
—
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
POR
—
—
—
0
Bit 7 ~ 5
4
3
2
1
0
DT02
DT01
DT00
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
0
0
0
DTPSC01 DTPSC00
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 4 ~ 3DTPSC01~DTPSC00: Dead time prescaler division ratio select
00: fD=fH/1
01: fD=fH/2
10: fD=fH/4
11: fD=fH/8
Bit 2 ~ 0DT02~DT00: Dead time select
000: dead time is [(1/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (1/fD)
001: dead time is [(2/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (2/fD)
010: dead time is [(3/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (3/fD)
011: dead time is [(4/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (4/fD)
100: dead time is [(5/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (5/fD)
101: dead time is [(6/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (6/fD)
110: dead time is [(7/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (7/fD)
111: dead time is [(8/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (8/fD)
CPR1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
Name
—
—
—
4
3
DTPSC11 DTPSC10
2
1
0
DT12
DT11
DT10
R/W
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 5
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 4 ~ 3DTPSC11~DTPSC10: Dead time prescaler division ratio select
00: fD=fH/1
01: fD=fH/2
10: fD=fH/4
11: fD=fH/8
Bit 2 ~ 0DT12~DT10: Dead time select
000: dead time is [(1/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (1/fD)
001: dead time is [(2/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (2/fD)
010: dead time is [(3/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (3/fD)
011: dead time is [(4/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (4/fD)
100: dead time is [(5/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (5/fD)
101: dead time is [(6/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (6/fD)
110: dead time is [(7/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (7/fD)
111: dead time is [(8/fD)-(1/fH)] ~ (8/fD)
Rev. 1.10
117
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Over Current Protection
The device includes an over current protection function which provides a protection mechanism for
the battery charge and discharge applications.
OCP Funciton
To prevent the possibility of large battery current and load current, the OCP input voltage from the
battery sense resistor is compared with a reference voltage generated by an 8-bit D/A converter. The
8-bit D/A converter power is supplied by the external power pin named DAPWR. Once the OCP
input voltage is greater than the reference voltage, it will force the OUT0H/OUT1H and OUT0L/
OUT1L signals inactive, i.e., the OUT0H/OUT1H signal will be forced into a high state and the
OUT0L/OUT1L signal will be forced into a low state before the polarity control, to turn the external
MOS off for over current protection.
The OUT0H/OUT1H and OUT0L/OUT1L signals can be forced to an inactive state when an over
current event occurs. If an over current event occurs, the corresponding interrupt will be generated.
Once the over current condition has disappeared, the OUT0H/OUT1H and OUT0L/OUT1L signals
will recover to drive the PWM output.
The operational amplifier in the over current protection circuitry can be configured in an inverting or
non-inverting OPA configuration to sense the battery current when the battery is undergoing a charge
or discharge operation. It is recommended that the OPA should be in a non-inverting mode during a
charge operation and in an inverting mode during a discharge operation.
More information for the OUTnH and OUTnL signal polarity and output control is described in the
TMPCn register.
OCP Circuit Operation
OCP is abbreviation of over current protects circuit. OCP detect input voltage which is proportional
to the monitored source current; if the input voltage is larger than reference voltage set by DAC,
OCP will issue an output signal indicate the source current is over specification.
OCPn�1� OCPn�0
fFLT=fH/�
OCPnDA
� bit DAC
OCP Input
Filte� �lo�k
G=1/5/10/15/�0
S0
S1
C
Filte�
OCP0O
A
S�
S3
R1
(R1=�0K)
R�
To ADC
OCPnG�~OCPnG0
OCPnF�~OCPnF0
Over Current Protection Block Diagram (n=0 or 1)
Rev. 1.10
118
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
The source voltage is input from OCPn0 or OCPn1. After this, four switches S0~S3 consist of a
mode select function. An OPAMP and two resistors consist of a PGA function; PGA gain can be
positive or negative determine by input voltage connect to positive input or negative input of PGA.
DAC is used to generate reference voltage. The comparator compares the reference voltage and the
amplified input voltage to produce Comparator output flag (OCPnCX ), finally filter out OCPnCX
to generate OCPnO and OCP interrupt, they are de-bounce version of OCPnCX used to indicates
that source current is over specification or not. OCPnO is defined as OCP output and OCP interrupt
trigger. The comparator of OCP also has hysteresis function controlled by OCPnCHY bit.
Note that the filter clock is fELT=fH/4. The amplified input voltage also can be read out by means of
another ADC from OPA output. DAC output voltage is controlled by OCPnDA register, and the
DAC output is define as
DAC VOUT = (DAC VREF/256) × D[7:0]
Input Voltage Range
The input voltage can be positive or negative, together with PGA operating mode, represent a more
flexible application.
(1) VIN > 0, PGA operates in non-inverting mode, the output voltage of PGA is
VOPGA=(1+R2/R1) × VIN
(2) For convinced using, when PGA operates in non-inverting mode, we provide a unity gain buffer
function.
If COPnM[1:0]=01 and OCPnG[2:0]=000, the PGA gain will be 1 and is configured as unity
gain buffer. The switches S2 and S3 will be open internally and the output voltage of PGA is VOPGA=VIN
(3) 0 > VIN >-0.4, PGA operates in inverting mode, the output voltage of PGA is
VOPGA=-(R2/R1) × VIN
Note: if VIN is negative, it should not lower than (-0.4V) to avoid leakage current.
OCP Register
Overall operation of the over current protection is controlled using several registers.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
OCP0C0
OCP0M1
OCP0M0
5
4
3
2
1
0
OCP0PC1 OCP0PC0 OCP01LEN OCP01HEN OCP00LEN OCP00HEN
OCP0C1
OCP0O
OCP0CHY
OCP0G2
OCP0G1
OCP0G0
OCP0F2
OCP0F1
OCP0DA
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A0CAL
A0OFM
A0RS
A0OF5
A0OF4
A0OF3
A0OF2
A0OF1
A0OF0
C0RS
C0OF4
C0OF3
C0OF2
C0OF1
C0OF0
C0CAL
OCP0CX
C0OFM
OCP1C0
OCP1M1
OCP1M0
OCP0F0
OCP1PC1 OCP1PC0 OCP11LEN OCP11HEN OCP10LEN OCP10HEN
OCP1C1
OCP1O
OCP1CHY
OCP1G2
OCP1G1
OCP1G0
OCP1F2
OCP1F1
OCP1DA
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
OCP1F0
D0
A1CAL
A1OFM
A1RS
A1OF5
A1OF4
A1OF3
A1OF2
A1OF1
A1OF0
C1CAL
OCP1CX
C1OFM
C1RS
C1OF4
C1OF3
C1OF2
C1OF1
C1OF0
OCPPC
—
—
OCP1RV
OCP0RV
OCP11C
OCP10C
OCP01C
OCP00C
OCP Register List
Rev. 1.10
119
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
OCPPC Register
Bit
7
6
Name
—
—
5
4
OCP1RV OCP0RV
3
2
1
0
OCP11C
OCP10C
OCP01C
OCP00C
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
1
1
1
1
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5OCP1RV: Select OCP1 DAC reference voltage
0: AVDD pin
1: DAPWR pin
Bit4OCP0RV: Select OCP0 DAC reference voltage
0: AVDD pin
1: DAPWR pin
Bit3OCP11C: Define PC6 is OCP11 input or not
0: Not OCP11 input
1: Analog input, OCP11
Bit 2OCP10C: Define PC5 is OCP10 input or not
0: Not OCP10 input
1: Analog input, OCP10
Bit 1OCP01C: Define PC4 is OCP01 input or not
0: Not OCP01 input
1: Analog input, OCP01
Bit 0OCP00C: Define PC3 is OCP00 input or not
0: Not OCP00 input
1: Analog input, OCP00
Rev. 1.10
120
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
OCP0C0 Register
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OCP0M1 OCP0M0 OCP0PC1 OCP0PC0 OCP01LEN OCP01HEN OCP00LEN OCP00HEN
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6OCP0M1~OCP0M0: Over Current Protection function 0 operating mode selection
00: OCP 0 disable, S1, S3 on, S0, S2 off
01: OCP 0 enable in non-inverter mode, S0, S3 on, S1, S2 off
10: OCP 0 enable in inverter mode, S1, S2 on, S0, S3 off
11: OCP 0 enable in internal 0V input mode, S1, S3 on, S0, S2 off
Bit 5~4OCP0PC1~OCP0PC0: Over Current Protection 0 Pin Control
00: OCP0 input is disabled
01: OCP0 input is disabled
10: OCP00 pin is used to as OCP0 input
11: OCP01 pin is used to as OCP0 input
Bit 3OCP01LEN: OUT1L Over Current Protection 0 Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT1L signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over current condition occurs.
Bit 2OCP01HEN: OUT1H Over Current Protection 0 Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT1H signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over current condition occurs
Bit 1OCP00LEN: OUT0L Over Current Protection 0 Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT0L signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over current condition occurs.
Bit 0OCP00HEN: OUT0H Over Current Protection 0 Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT0H signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over current condition occurs.
Rev. 1.10
121
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
OCP0C1 Register
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
3
OCP0O OCP0CHY OCP0G2 OCP0G1 OCP0G0
2
1
0
OCP0F2
OCP0F1
OCP0F0
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
×
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7OCP0O: Over Current Protection 0 Comparator Filter Digital Output
0: The monitored source current is not over
1: The monitored source current is over
Bit 6OCP0CHY: Over Current Protection 0 Comparator Hysteresis Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 5~3OCP0G2~OCP0G0: Over Current Protection 0 OPA gain selection
000: ×1
001: ×5
010: ×10
011: ×15
100: ×20
101: ×20
110: ×20
111: ×20
Bit 2~0OCP0F2~OCP0F0: Over Current Protection 0 demodulation filter selection
000: 0 tFLT (without filter)
001: 1~2 × tFLT
010: 3~4 × tFLT
011: 7~8 × tFLT
100: 15~16 × tFLT
101: 31~32 × tFLT
110: 63~64 × tFLT
111: 127~128 × tFLT
Note: fFLT=fH/4, tFLT=1/fFLT
OCP0DA Register
Bit
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.10
7
OCP 0 DAC Data Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
8-bit DAC data bits.
OCP 0 DAC Output = (DAC reference voltage) × (DAC.7~0)/256
122
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
A0CAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
A0OFM
A0RS
A0OF5
A0OF4
A0OF3
A0OF2
A0OF1
A0OF0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7A0OFM: Over Current Protection 0 Operational Amplifier Input Offset Voltage
Cancellation Mode Select
0: Operational Amplifier mode
1: Input Offset Voltage Cancellation mode
Note: Only if the bits OCP0M1~OCP0M0=11, it can enter into the input offset voltage
cancellation mode.
Bit 6A0RS: Over Current Protection 0 Operational Amplifier Offset Voltage Cancellation
Reference Input Select
0: Operational Amplifier negative input selected
1: Operational Amplifier positive input selected
Bit 5~0A0OF5~A0OF0: Over Current Protection 0 Operational Amplifier Input Voltage
Offset Cancellation Setting
C0CAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
OCP0CX
C0OFM
C0RS
C0OF4
C0OF3
C0OF2
C0OF1
C0OF0
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
×
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Bit 7OCP0CX: Over Current Protection 0 Comparator or Operational Amplifier Digital
Output for Input Offset Voltage Cancellation mode
0: Positive input voltage < negative input voltage
1: Positive input voltage > negative input voltagel
Bit 6C0OFM: Over Current Protection 0 Comparator Input Offset Voltage Cancellation
Mode Select
0: Comparator mode
1: Input Offset Voltage Cancellation mode
Note: Only if the bits OCP0M1~OCP0M0=11, it can enter into the input offset voltage
cancellation mode.
Bit 5C0RS: Over Current Protection 0 Comparator Offset Voltage Cancellation Reference
Input Select
0: Comparator negative input selected
1: Comparator positive input selected
Bit 4~0C0OF4~C0OF0: Over Current Protection 0 Comparator Input Voltage Offset
Cancellation Setting
Rev. 1.10
123
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
OCP1C0 Register
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OCP1M1 OCP1M0 OCP1PC1 OCP1PC0 OCP11LEN OCP11HEN OCP10LEN OCP10HEN
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6OCP1M1~OCP1M0: Over Current Protection function 1 operating mode selection
00: OCP 1 disable, S1, S3 on, S0, S2 off
01: OCP 1 enable in non-inverter mode, S0, S3 on, S1, S2 off
10: OCP 1 enable in inverter mode, S1, S2 on, S0, S3 off
11: OCP 1 enable in internal 0V input mode, S1, S3 on, S0, S2 off
Bit 5~4OCP1PC1~OCP1PC0: Over Current Protection 1 Pin Control
00: OCP1 input is disabled
01: OCP1 input is disabled
10: OCP10 pin is used to as OCP1 input
11: OCP11 pin is used to as OCP1 input
Bit 3OCP11LEN: OUT1L Over Current Protection 1 Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT1L signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over current condition occurs.
Bit 2OCP11HEN: OUT1H Over Current Protection 1 Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT1H signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over current condition occurs
Bit 1OCP10LEN: OUT0L Over Current Protection 1 Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT0L signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over current condition occurs.
Bit 0OCP00HEN: OUT0H Over Current Protection 1 Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT0H signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over current condition occurs.
Rev. 1.10
124
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
OCP1C1 Register
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
3
OCP1O OCP1CHY OCP1G2 OCP1G1 OCP1G0
2
1
0
OCP1F2
OCP1F1
OCP1F0
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
×
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7OCP1O: Over Current Protection 1 Comparator Filter Digital Output
0: The monitored source current is not over
1: The monitored source current is over
Bit 6OCP1CHY: Over Current Protection 1 Comparator Hysteresis Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 5~3OCP1G2~OCP1G0: Over Current Protection 1 OPA gain selection
000: ×1
001: ×5
010: ×10
011: ×15
100: ×20
101: ×20
110: ×20
111: ×20
Bit 2~0OCP1F2~OCP1F0: Over Current Protection1 demodulation filter selection
000: 0 tFLT (without filter)
001: 1~2 × tFLT
010: 3~4 × tFLT
011: 7~8 × tFLT
100: 15~16 × tFLT
101: 31~32 × tFLT
110: 63~64 × tFLT
111: 127~128 × tFLT
Note: fFLT=fH/4, tFLT=1/fFLT
OCP1DA Register
Bit
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.10
7
OCP 1 DAC Data Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
8-bit DAC data bits.
OCP 1 DAC Output = (DAC reference voltage) × (DAC.7~0)/256
125
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
A1CAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
A1OFM
A1RS
A1OF5
A1OF4
A1OF3
A1OF2
A1OF1
A1OF0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7A1OFM: Over Current Protection 1 Operational Amplifier Input Offset Voltage
Cancellation Mode Select
0: Operational Amplifier mode
1: Input Offset Voltage Cancellation mode
Note: Only if the bits OCP1M1~OCP1M0=11, it can enter into the input offset voltage
cancellation mode.
Bit 6A1RS: Over Current Protection 1 Operational Amplifier Offset Voltage Cancellation
Reference Input Select
0: Operational Amplifier negative input selected
1: Operational Amplifier positive input selected
Bit 5~0A1OF5~A1OF0: Over Current Protection 1 Operational Amplifier Input Voltage
Offset Cancellation Setting
C1CAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
OCP1CX
C1OFM
C1RS
C1OF4
C1OF3
C1OF2
C1OF1
C1OF0
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
×
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Bit 7OCP1CX: Over Current Protection 1 Comparator or Operational Amplifier Digital
Output for Input Offset Voltage Cancellation mode
0: positive input voltage < negative input voltage
1: positive input voltage > negative input voltagel
Bit 6C1OFM: Over Current Protection 1 Comparator Input Offset Voltage Cancellation
Mode Select
0: Comparator mode
1: Input Offset Voltage Cancellation mode
Note: Only if the bits OCP1M1~OCP1M0=11, it can enter into the input offset voltage
cancellation mode.
Bit 5C1RS: Over Current Protection 1 Comparator Offset Voltage Cancellation Reference
Input Select
0: Comparator negative input selected
1: Comparator positive input selected
Bit 4~0C1OF4~C1OF0: Over Current Protection 1 Comparator Input Voltage Offset
Cancellation Setting
Rev. 1.10
126
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Offset Calibration
The OCP circuit has 4 operating modes controlled by OCPnM [1:0], one of it is calibration mode. In
calibration mode, OP and comparator offset can be calibrated.
OPAMP Calibration:
Step1: Set OCPnM [1:0] =11, AnOFM =1, OCP is now under OPAMP calibration status
Step2: Set AnOF [5:0] =000000 then read OCPnCX bit
Step3: Let AnOF[5:0]=AnOF[5:0]+1 then read OCPnCX bit, if OCPnCX is changed; record the
AnOF[5:0] data as VOS1
Step4: Set AnOF [5:0] =111111 then read OCPnCX bit
Step5: Let AnOF[5:0]=AnOF[5:0]-1 then read OCPnCX bit, if OCPnCX is changed; record the
AnOF[5:0] data as VOS2
Step6: Restore VOS = (VOS1 + VOS2)/2 to AnOF[5:0], the calibration is finished.
Comparator Calibration:
Step1: Set OCPnM[1:0] =11, CnOFM =1, OCP is now under comparator calibration status.
Step2: Set CnOF [4:0] =00000 then read OCPnCX bit
Step3: Let CnOF=CnOF+1 then read OCPnCX bit, if OCPnCX is changed; record the CnOF[4:0]
data as VOS1
Step4: Set CnOF [4:0] =11111 then read OCPnCX bit
Step5: Let CnOF[4:0]=CnOF[4:0]-1 then read OCPnCX bitr, if OCPnCX data is changed; record
the CnOF[4:0] data as VOS2.
Step6: Restore VOS = (VOS1 + VOS2)/2 to CnOF[4:0], the calibration is finished.
Over Voltage Protection and Under Voltage Protection
The device is build-in with the over/under voltage protection which can be used for the application
of battery charge/discharge.
OVP Function:
To prevent from output voltage greater than 5.4V, the OVP input voltage can be compared with 8
bit reference voltage. Once OVP is greater than reference voltage, it will force OUT0H/OUT0L,
OUT1H/OUT1L inactive i.e., the OUT0H/OUT1H signal will be forced into a high state and the
OUT0L/OUT1L signal will be forced into a low state to turn external MOS off for protection.
UVP Function:
To prevent from output voltage less than 1.0V (external circuit short), the UVP input voltage can
be compared with 8 bit reference voltage. Once UVP is less than reference voltage, it will force
OUT0H/OUT0L, OUT1H/OUT1L inactive i.e., the OUT0H/OUT1H signal will be forced into a
high state and the OUT0L/OUT1L signal will be forced into a low state to turn external MOS off for
protection.
The OUT0H/OUT0L, OUT1H/OUT1L can be forced as inactive state for either OVP or UVP
occurs. The OVP/UVP also generates interrupt to inform MCU. Once OVP/UVP disappears, the
OUT0H/OUT0L, OUT1H/OUT1L will recover to send PWM output.
More information for the OUTnH and OUTnL signal polarity and output control is described in the
TMPCn register.
Rev. 1.10
127
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
OVPDA[7:0]
OVPDB1, OVPDB0
8-bit
DAC
DAC VREF
OVP Interrupt
-
OUVPPC1, OUVPPC0
+
OVP
CMP
Debounce
OVPLEN, OVPHEN
OVPCHY
Stop DC/DC PWM
OUVP00
OUVPPC1, OUVPPC0
OUVP01
OUVPPC1, OUVPPC0
UVPDB1, UVPDB0
UVP Interrupt
-
OUVP02
8-bit
DAC
DAC VREF
+
UVP
CMP
Debounce
UVPLEN, UVPHEN
UVPCHY
Stop DC/DC PWM
UVPDA[7:0]
Over/under voltage protection Block Diagram
OUVP Register
Overall operation of the voltage protection and under voltage protection is controlled using several
registers.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVPDA
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
OVPCHY
—
OUVPRV
OVPDB1
OVPDB0
UVPDA
D7
OUVPC0
OVPCX
OUVPPC1 OUVPPC0
OUVPC1
UVPCX
OVPEN
UVPEN
UVPCHY
—
—
UVPDB1
UVPDB0
OUVPC2
UVP1LEN
UVP1HEN
UVP0LEN
UVP0HEN
OVP1LEN
OVP1HEN
OVP0LEN
OVP0HEN
OUVP Register List
OVPDA Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
OVP DAC Data Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
8-bit DAC data bits.
OVP DAC Output = (DAC reference voltage) × (DAC.7~0)/256
UVPDA Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.10
UVP DAC Data Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
8-bit DAC data bits.
UVP DAC Output = (DAC reference voltage) × (DAC.7~0)/256
128
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
OUVPC0 Register
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
OVPCX OUVPPC1 OUVPPC0 OVPCHY
3
­—
2
1
0
OUVPRV OVPDB1 OVPDB0
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
×
0
0
0
—
0
0
0
Bit 7OVPCX: Over Voltage Protection Comparator Digital Output
0: Positive input voltage < negative input voltage
1: Positive input voltage > negative input voltage
Bit 6~5OUVPPC1~OUVPPC0: Over Voltage Protection and Under Voltage Protection Pin
Control
00: OUVP input is disabled
01: OUVP00 pin is used to as OUVP input
10: OUVP01 pin is used to as OUVP input
11: OUVP02 pin is used to as OUVP input
Bit 4OVPCHY: Over Voltage Protection Comparator Hysteresis Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 3
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2OUVPRV: Select OVP and UVP DAC reference voltage
0: AVDD pin
1: DAPWR pin
Bit 1~0OVPDB1~OVPDB0: Over Voltage Protection Comparator Debounce Time Select
00: No debounce
01: debounce time = (7~8) × 1/fH
10: debounce time = (15~16) × 1/fH
11: debounce time = (31~32) × 1/fH
OUVPC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
UVPCX
OVPEN
UVPEN
UVPCHY
­—
­—
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
×
0
0
0
—
—
0
0
UVPDB1 UVPDB0
Bit 7UVPCX: Under Voltage Protection Comparator Digital Output
0: Positive input voltage < negative input voltage
1: Positive input voltage > negative input voltage
Bit 6OVPEN: Over Voltage Protection function Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
If the OVPEN bit is cleared to 0, the over voltage protection function is disabled and
no power will be consumed. This results in the comparator and D/A converter of OVP
all being switched off.
Bit 5UVPEN: Under Voltage Protection function Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
If the UVPEN bit is cleared to 0, the under voltage protection function is disabled and
no power will be consumed. This results in the comparator and D/A converter of UVP
all being switched off.
Bit 4UVPCHY: Under Voltage Protection Comparator Hysteresis Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 3~2
Rev. 1.10
Unimplemented, read as “0”
129
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 1~0UVPDB1~UVPDB0: Under Voltage Protection Comparator Debounce Time Select
00: No debounce
01: debounce time = (7~8) × 1/fH
10: debounce time = (15~16) × 1/fH
11: debounce time = (31~32) × 1/fH
OUVPC2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name UVP1LEN UVP1HEN UVP0LEN UVP0HEN OVP1LEN OVP1HEN OVP0LEN OVP0HEN
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7UVP1LEN: OUT1L Under Voltage Protection Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT1L signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over voltage condition occurs.
Bit 6UVP1HEN: OUT1H Under Voltage Protection Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT1H signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over voltage condition occurs.
Bit 5UVP0LEN: OUT0L Under Voltage Protection Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT0L signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over voltage condition occurs.
Bit 4UVP0HEN: OUT0H Under Voltage Protection Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT0H signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over voltage condition occurs.
Bit 3OVP1LEN: OUT1L Over Voltage Protection Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT1L signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over voltage condition occurs.
Bit 2OVP1HEN: OUT1H Over Voltage Protection Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT1H signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over voltage condition occurs.
Bit 1OVP0LEN: OUT0L Over Voltage Protection Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT0L signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over voltage condition occurs.
Bit 0OVP0HEN: OUT0H Over Voltage Protection Enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit is used to control whether the OUT0H signal is forced into an inactive state
when an over voltage condition occurs.
Rev. 1.10
130
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
USB Charge/Discharge Auto Detection
The device includes three USB ports named D0+/D0-, D1+/D1- and D2+/D2- to implement the
Charge/Discharge Auto Detection functions. Users can distinguish the device connected to the USB
ports is a dedicated charger, portable device, general USB interface or charging device with USB
interface by monitoring the voltage and current of the connected USB lines.
USB0
The USB0 port is used to connect to a dedicated charger port to charge this device with a specific
voltage and current. The D0+ line can output a voltage, VDP_SRC, with a value of 0.6V, which is
enabled by setting the VDPON bit of ADUC0 register and switched on by setting the D0PS bit
in the ADUC1 register. If the D0PS bit is set to 1 to select the VDP_SRC voltage to be output, the
corresponding I/O pin function will automatically be disabled by hardware. When this port is
connected to a dedicated charger, the 0.6V voltage can be output on the D0+ line and then measured
on the D0- line by the A/D converter. The USB0 lines, D0+ and D0-, are pin-shared with normal I/
O function and A/D function determined by the ACE8 and ACE9 bits respectively in the ACERH
register. Both the D0+ and D0- lines are internally connected a pull low resistor to VSS which is
controlled by the D0NPL and D0PPL bits in the ADUC2 register. It is important to note that the
analog function has higher priority than digital functions when the analog and digital functions are
implemented on the same pin.
Dedicated Charger /
Charging Host
HT45FH4N
D0+
D+
D0-
D-
ACE8
PD0
AN8
VDP_SRC
D0PS
PD1
A/D
Converter
AN9
ACE9
Note: The D0- is only internally used and is not connected to the external pin for the HT45FH4N
device.
USB0 Connection Diagram
Rev. 1.10
131
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
USB1, USB2
The USB1 and USB2 ports are used to connect to portable devices to supply power with a specific
voltage and current. The USB1 and USB2 lines, D1+ /D1- and D2+ /D2-, are pin-shared with
normal I/O function, A/D function and D/A function determined by the ACE10~ACE13 bits, D1NS/
D1PS and D2NS/D2PS bits respectively. There is an analog switch connected between the D1+
and D1- lines, which is controlled by the USW1 bit. Similarly, there is an analog switch connected
between the D2+ and D2- lines, which is controlled by the USW2 bit. When the USW1 or USW2 bit
is set to 1 to internally connect the D1+ /D1- or D2+ /D2- lines, the USB1, USB2 functions and the
output function of the I/O pin shared with the D1- or D2- line will automatically be disabled if the
D1+ /D1- or D2+ /D2- lines are both configured as I/O pin output function. The D1+ /D1- and D2+ /
D2- lines are individually connected a pull low resistor to VSS respectively which are controlled by
the D1NPL/D1PPL and D2NPL/D2PPL bits in the ADUC2 register. It is important to note that the
analog function has higher priority than digital functions when the analog and digital functions are
implemented on the same pin.
HT45FH4N
Portable Device
D1+
PD2
D+
ACE10
VR
AN10
DAC0
A/D
D1PS
USB
PHY
USW1
D1PD3
D-
ACE11
AN11
DAC1
A/D
D1NS
USB1 Connection Diagram
HT45FH4N
Portable Device
D2+
PD4
D+
ACE12
VR
AN12
DAC0
A/D
D2PS
USB
PHY
USW2
D2PD5
D-
ACE13
AN13
DAC1
A/D
D2NS
USB2 Connection Diagram
Rev. 1.10
132
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
USB Charge/Discharge Auto Detection Registers
Overall operation of the USB charge/discharge auto detection function is controlled using several
registers.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADUDA0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
ADUDA1
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
ADUC0
—
VDPON
USW2
USW1
DAC1RV
DAC0RV
ADUC1
—
—
D2NS
D2PS
D1NS
D1PS
—
D0PS
ADUC2
—
—
D2NPL
D2PPL
D1NPL
D1PPL
D0NPL
D0PPL
DAC1ON DAC0ON
ADUDA0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
DAC0 Data Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
8-bit DAC0 data bits.
DAC0 Output = (VDD or DAPWR) × (ADUDA0 [7~0]) / 256
ADUDA1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.10
DAC1 Data Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
8-bit DAC1 data bits.
DAC1 Output = (VDD or DAPWR) × (ADUDA1 [7~0]) / 256
133
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
ADUC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
—
VDPON
USW2
USW1
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
3
2
1
0
DAC1RV DAC0RV DAC1ON DAC0ON
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 6VDPON: VDP_SRC voltage enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 5USW2: USB2 D2+/D2- switch control
0: Switch off
1: Switch on
If this bit is set to 1 to connect the D2+ and D2- lines together, the USB2 function
will be disable automatically and the output function of the I/O pin shared with the
D2- line will also be disabled if the D2+ and D2- lines are both configured as I/O pin
output function.
Bit 4USW1: USB1 D1+/D1- switch control
0: Switch off
1: Switch on
If this bit is set to 1 to connect the D1+ and D1- lines together, the USB1 function
will be disable automatically and the output function of the I/O pin shared with the
D1- line will also be disabled if the D1+ and D1- lines are both configured as I/O pin
output function.
Bit 3DAC1RV: DAC1 reference voltage Select
0: VDD pin
1: DAPWR pin
Bit 2DAC0RV: DAC0 reference voltage Select
0: VDD pin
1: DAPWR pin
Bit 1DAC1ON: DAC1 enable Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0DAC0ON: DAC0 enable Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.10
134
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
ADUC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
D2NS
D2PS
D1NS
D1PS
—
D0PS
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
—
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5D2NS: Define D2- is DAC1 output or not
0: Not DAC1 output
1: DAC1 output
Bit 4D2PS: Define D2+ is DAC0 output or not
0: Not DAC0 output
1: DAC0 output
Bit 3D1NS: Define D1- is DAC1 output or not
0: Not DAC1 output
1: DAC1 output
Bit 2D1PS: Define D1+ is DAC0 output or not
0: Not DAC0 output
1: DAC0 output
Bit 1
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 0
D0PS: Define D0+ is VDP_SRC output or not
0: Not VDP_SRC output
1: VDP_SRC output
ADUC2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
D2NPL
D2PPL
D1NPL
D1PPL
D0NPL
D0PPL
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5D2NPL: D2- pin Pull-Low Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 4D2PPL: D2+ pin Pull-Low Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 3D1NPL: D1- pin Pull-Low Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 2D1PPL: D1+ pin Pull-Low Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 1D0NPL: D0- pin Pull-Low Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0D0PPL: D0+ pin Pull-Low Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.10
135
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Interrupts
Interrupts are an important part of any microcontroller system. When an external event or an
internal function such as a Timer Module or an A/D converter requires microcontroller attention,
their corresponding interrupt will enforce a temporary suspension of the main program allowing the
microcontroller to direct attention to their respective needs. The device contains several external
interrupt and internal interrupts functions. The external interrupt is generated by the action of the
external INT0, INT1 and INT2 pins, while the internal interrupts are generated by various internal
functions such as the TMs, under voltage protection function, over voltage protection function, over
current protection functions, Time Base, LVD, EEPROM and the A/D converter.
Interrupt Registers
Overall interrupt control, which basically means the setting of request flags when certain
microcontroller conditions occur and the setting of interrupt enable bits by the application program,
is controlled by a series of registers, located in the Special Purpose Data Memory, as shown in the
accompanying table. The number of registers depends upon the device chosen but fall into three
categories. The first is the INTC0~INTC3 registers which setup the primary interrupts, the second
is the MFI0~MFI3 registers which setup the Multi-function interrupts. Finally there is an INTEG
register to setup the external interrupt trigger edge type.
Each register contains a number of enable bits to enable or disable individual registers as well as
interrupt flags to indicate the presence of an interrupt request. The naming convention of these
follows a specific pattern. First is listed an abbreviated interrupt type, then the (optional) number of
that interrupt followed by either an “E” for enable/disable bit or “F” for request flag.
Function
Enable Bit
Request Flag
EMI
—
INTn Pin
INTnE
INTnF
OVP
OVPE
OVPF
—
UVP
UVPE
UVPF
—
OCPnE
OCPnF
Global
OCPn
Notes
—
n=0~2
n=0 or 1
A/D Converter
ADE
ADF
Multi-function
MFnE
MFnF
n=0~3
—
Time Base
n=0 or 1
TBnE
TBnF
LVD
LVE
LVF
—
EEPROM
DEE
DEF
—
TnPE
TnPF
TnAE
TnAF
TM
n=0~3
Interrupt Register Bit Naming Conventions
Name
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
INTEG
—
—
INT2S1
INT2S0
INT1S1
INT1S0
INT0S1
INT0S0
INTC0
—
OCP0F
OVPF
OCP1F
OCP0E
OVPE
OCP1E
EMI
INTC1
INT2F
INT1F
INT0F
UVPF
INT2E
INT1E
INT0E
UVPE
INTC2
MF3F
MF2F
MF1F
MF0F
MF3E
MF2E
MF1E
MF0E
INTC3
LVF
TB1F
TB0F
ADF
LVE
TB1E
TB0E
ADE
MFI0
—
DEF
T0AF
T0PF
—
DEE
T0AE
T0PE
MFI1
—
—
T1AF
T1PF
—
—
T1AE
T1PE
MFI2
—
—
T2AF
T2PF
—
—
T2AE
T2PE
MFI3
—
—
T3AF
T3PF
—
—
T3AE
T3PE
Interrupt Register Contents
Rev. 1.10
136
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
INTEG Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
INT2S1
INT2S0
INT1S1
INT1S0
INT0S1
INT0S0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6 Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5 ~ 4
INT2S1, INT2S0: Defines INT2 interrupt active edge
00: Disabled Interrupt
01: Rising Edge Interrupt
10: Falling Edge Interrupt
11: Dual Edge Interrupt
Bit 3 ~ 2
INT1S1, INT1S0: Defines INT1 interrupt active edge
00: Disabled Interrupt
01: Rising Edge Interrupt
10: Falling Edge Interrupt
11: Dual Edge Interrupt
Bit 1 ~ 0
INT0S1, INT0S0: Defines INT0 interrupt active edge
00: Disabled Interrupt
01: Rising Edge Interrupt
10: Falling Edge Interrupt
11: Dual Edge Interrupt
INTC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
OCP0F
OVPF
OCP1F
OCP0E
OVPE
OCP1E
EMI
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 6OCP0F: Over current protection 0 interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 5OVPF: Over voltage protection interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4OCP1F: Over current protection 1 interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3 OCP0E: Over current protection 0 interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 2OVPE: Over voltage protection interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 1OCP1E: Over current protection 1 interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0EMI: Global Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.10
137
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
INTC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
INT2F
INT1F
INT0F
UVPF
INT2E
INT1E
INT0E
UVPE
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7INT2F: INT2 interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 6INT1F: INT1 interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 5INT0F: INT0 interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4UVPF: Under voltage protection interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3 INT2E: INT2 interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 2INT1E: INT1 interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 1INT0E: INT0 interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0UVPE: Under voltage protection interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.10
138
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
INTC2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
MF3F
MF2F
MF1F
MF0F
MF3E
MF2E
MF1E
MF0E
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7MF3F: Multi-function interrupt 3 request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 6MF2F: Multi-function interrupt 2 request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 5MF1F: Multi-function interrupt 1 request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4MF0F: Multi-function interrupt 0 request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3 MF3E: Multi-function interrupt 3 control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 2MF2E: Multi-function interrupt 2 control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 1MF1E: Multi-function interrupt 1 control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0MF0E: Multi-function interrupt 0 control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.10
139
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
INTC3 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
LVF
TB1F
TB0F
ADF
LVE
TB1E
TB0E
ADE
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7LVF: LVD interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 6TB1F: Time Base 1 interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 5TB0F: Time Base 0 interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4ADF: A/D converter interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3LVE: LVD interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 2TB1E: Time Base 1 interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 1TB0E: Time Base 0 interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0ADE: A/D converter interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.10
140
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
MFI0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
DEF
T0AF
T0PF
—
DEE
T0AE
T0PE
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
—
0
0
0
Bit 7 Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 6DEF: Data EEPROM interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 5T0AF: TM0 comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4T0PF: TM0 comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3 Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2 DEE: Data EEPROM interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 1T0AE: TM0 comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0T0PE: TM0 comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
MFI1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
T1AF
T1PF
—
—
T1AE
T1PE
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
—
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5T1AF: TM1 comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4T1PF: TM1 comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3 ~ 2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1T1AE: TM1 comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0T1PE: TM1 comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.10
141
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
MFI2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
T2AF
T2PF
—
—
T2AE
T2PE
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
—
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5T2AF: TM2 comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4T2PF: TM2 comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3 ~ 2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1T2AE: TM2 comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0T2PE: TM2 comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
MFI3 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
T3AF
T3PF
—
—
T3AE
T3PE
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
—
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5T3AF: TM3 comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4T3PF: TM3 comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3 ~ 2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1T3AE: TM3 comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0T3PE: TM3 comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.10
142
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Interrupt Operation
When the conditions for an interrupt event occur, such as a TM Comparator P or Comparator A
match or A/D conversion completion etc, the relevant interrupt request flag will be set. Whether
the request flag actually generates a program jump to the relevant interrupt vector is determined by
the condition of the interrupt enable bit. If the enable bit is set high then the program will jump to
its relevant vector; if the enable bit is zero then although the interrupt request flag is set an actual
interrupt will not be generated and the program will not jump to the relevant interrupt vector. The
global interrupt enable bit, if cleared to zero, will disable all interrupts.
When an interrupt is generated, the Program Counter, which stores the address of the next instruction
to be executed, will be transferred onto the stack. The Program Counter will then be loaded with a
new address which will be the value of the corresponding interrupt vector. The microcontroller will
then fetch its next instruction from this interrupt vector. The instruction at this vector will usually
be a “JMP” which will jump to another section of program which is known as the interrupt service
routine. Here is located the code to control the appropriate interrupt. The interrupt service routine
must be terminated with a “RETI”, which retrieves the original Program Counter address from
the stack and allows the microcontroller to continue with normal execution at the point where the
interrupt occurred.
The various interrupt enable bits, together with their associated request flags, are shown in the
accompanying diagrams with their order of priority. Some interrupt sources have their own
individual vector while others share the same multi-function interrupt vector. Once an interrupt
subroutine is serviced, all the other interrupts will be blocked, as the global interrupt enable bit,
EMI bit will be cleared automatically. This will prevent any further interrupt nesting from occurring.
However, if other interrupt requests occur during this interval, although the interrupt will not be
immediately serviced, the request flag will still be recorded.
If an interrupt requires immediate servicing while the program is already in another interrupt service
routine, the EMI bit should be set after entering the routine, to allow interrupt nesting. If the stack
is full, the interrupt request will not be acknowledged, even if the related interrupt is enabled, until
the Stack Pointer is decremented. If immediate service is desired, the stack must be prevented from
becoming full. In case of simultaneous requests, the accompanying diagram shows the priority that
is applied. All of the interrupt request flags when set will wake-up the device if it is in SLEEP or
IDLE Mode, however to prevent a wake-up from occurring the corresponding flag should be set
before the device is in SLEEP or IDLE Mode.
Rev. 1.10
143
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Legend
xxF
Request Flag – no auto reset in ISR
EMI auto disabled in ISR
xxF Request Flag – auto reset in ISR
xxE Enable Bit
Interrupt
Name
Request
Flags
Enable
Bits
Master
Enable
Vector
Over Current
Protection 1
OCP1F
OCP1E
EMI
04H
Over Voltage
Protection
OVPF
OVPE
Over current
Protection 0
OCP0F
OCP0E
EMI
0CH
UVPE
EMI
10H
Under Voltage
UVPF
Protection
Interrupt
Name
Request
Flags
EMI
08H
Enable
Bits
INT0 Pin
INT0F
INT0E
EMI
14H
EEPROM
DEF
DEE
INT1 Pin
INT1F
INT1E
EMI
18H
TM0 P
T0PF
T0PE
INT2 Pin
INT2F
INT2E
EMI
1CH
TM0 A
T0AF
T0AE
M. Funct. 0
MF0F
MF0E
EMI
20H
TM1 P
T1PF
T1PE
M. Funct. 1
MF1F
MF1E
EMI
24H
TM1 A
T1AF
T1AE
M. Funct. 2
MF2F
MF2E
EMI
28H
TM2 P
T2PF
T2PE
TM2 A
T2AF
T2AE
M. Funct. 3
MF3F
MF3E
EMI
2CH
TM3 P
T3PF
T3PE
A/D
ADF
ADE
EMI
30H
TM3 A
T3AF
T3AE
Time Base 0
TB0F
TB0E
EMI
34H
Time Base 1
TB1F
TB1E
EMI
38H
LVF
LVE
EMI
3CH
Interrupts contained within
Multi-Function Interrupts
LVD
Priority
High
Low
Interrupt Structure
Rev. 1.10
144
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
External Interrupt
The external interrupts are controlled by signal transitions on the pins INT0~INT2. An external
interrupt request will take place when the external interrupt request flags, INT0F~INT2F, are set,
which will occur when a transition, whose type is chosen by the edge select bits, appears on the
external interrupt pins. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the
global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and respective external interrupt enable bit, INT0E~INT2E, must
first be set. Additionally the correct interrupt edge type must be selected using the INTEG register to
enable the external interrupt function and to choose the trigger edge type. As the external interrupt
pins are pin-shared with I/O pins, they can only be configured as external interrupt pins if their
external interrupt enable bit in the corresponding interrupt register has been set.
The pin must also be setup as an input by setting the corresponding bit in the port control register.
When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the correct transition type appears on the
external interrupt pin, a subroutine call to the external interrupt vector, will take place. When the
interrupt is serviced, the external interrupt request flags, INT0F~INT2F, will be automatically
reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts. Note that any pullhigh resistor selections on the external interrupt pins will remain valid even if the pin is used as an
external interrupt input.
The INTEG register is used to select the type of active edge that will trigger the external interrupt.
A choice of either rising or falling or both edge types can be chosen to trigger an external interrupt.
Note that the INTEG register can also be used to disable the external interrupt function.
UVP Interrupt
An UVP interrupt request will take place when the Under Voltage Protection Interrupt request flag,
UVPF, is set, which occurs when the Under Voltage Protection function detects an under voltage
condition. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global
interrupt enable bit, EMI, and Under Voltage Protection Interrupt enable bit, must first be set. When
the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a low voltage condition occurs, a subroutine call to
the UVP Interrupt vector, will take place. When the Under Voltage Protection Interrupt is serviced,
the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts and the interrupt request flag
will be also automatically cleared.
OVP Interrupt
An OVP interrupt request will take place when the Over Voltage Protection Interrupt request flag,
OVPF, is set, which occurs when the Over Voltage Protection function detects an over voltage
condition. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global
interrupt enable bit, EMI, and Over Voltage Protection Interrupt enable bit, must first be set. When
the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a low voltage condition occurs, a subroutine call to
the OVP Interrupt vector, will take place. When the Over Voltage Protection Interrupt is serviced,
the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts and the interrupt request flag
will be also automatically cleared.
Rev. 1.10
145
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
OCP Interrupt
An OCP0, OCP1 interrupt request will take place when the Over Current Protection 0, 1 Interrupt
request flag, OCP0F, OCP1F, is set, which occurs when the Over Current Protection 0, 1 function
detects an over current condition. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector
address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and Over Current Protection 0, 1 Interrupt enable bit,
must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a low voltage condition
occurs, a subroutine call to the OCP0, OCP1 Interrupt vector, will take place. When the Over
Current Protection Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other
interrupts and the interrupt request flag will be also automatically cleared.
Multi-function Interrupt
Within the device there are four Multi-function interrupts. Unlike the other independent interrupts,
these interrupts have no independent source, but rather are formed from other existing interrupt
sources, namely the TM Interrupts and EEPROM Interrupt. A Multi-function interrupt request will
take place when any of the Multi-function interrupt request flags, MFnF are set. The Multi-function
interrupt flags will be set when any of their included functions generate an interrupt request flag.
To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, when the Multi-function
interrupt is enabled and the stack is not full, and either one of the interrupts contained within each
of Multi-function interrupt occurs, a subroutine call to one of the Multi-function interrupt vectors
will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the related Multi-Function request flag, will be
automatically reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts.
However, it must be noted that, although the Multi-function Interrupt flags will be automatically
reset when the interrupt is serviced, the request flags from the original source of the Multi-function
interrupts, namely the TM Interrupts and EEPROM Interrupt will not be automatically reset and
must be manually reset by the application program.
A/D Converter Interrupt
The A/D Converter Interrupt is controlled by the termination of an A/D conversion process. An A/D
Converter Interrupt request will take place when the A/D Converter Interrupt request flag, ADF, is
set, which occurs when the A/D conversion process finishes. To allow the program to branch to its
respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and A/D Interrupt enable bit,
ADE, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the A/D conversion
process has ended, a subroutine call to the A/D Converter Interrupt vector, will take place. When the
interrupt is serviced, the A/D Converter Interrupt flag, ADF, will be automatically cleared. The EMI
bit will also be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts.
Rev. 1.10
146
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Time Base Interrupts
The function of the Time Base Interrupts is to provide regular time signal in the form of an internal
interrupt. They are controlled by the overflow signals from their respective timer functions. When
these happens their respective interrupt request flags, TB0F or TB1F will be set. To allow the
program to branch to their respective interrupt vector addresses, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI
and Time Base enable bits, TB0E or TB1E, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack
is not full and the Time Base overflows, a subroutine call to their respective vector locations will
take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the respective interrupt request flag, TB0F or TB1F, will
be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be cleared to disable other interrupts.
The purpose of the Time Base Interrupt is to provide an interrupt signal at fixed time periods. Their
clock sources originate from the internal clock source fTB. This fTB input clock passes through a
divider, the division ratio of which is selected by programming the appropriate bits in the TBC
register to obtain longer interrupt periods whose value ranges. The clock source that generates fTB,
which in turn controls the Time Base interrupt period, can originate from several different sources,
as shown in the System Operating Mode section.
TBC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TBON
TBCK
TB11
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TB10
—
TB02
TB01
TB00
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
1
R/W
1
—
1
1
1
Bit 7TBON: TB0 and TB1 Control bit
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 6TBCK: Select fTB Clock
0: fTBC
1: fSYS/4
Bit 5 ~ 4
TB11 ~ TB10: Select Time Base 1 Time-out Period
00: 4096/fTB
01: 8192/fTB
10: 16384/fTB
11: 32768/fTB
Bit 3
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2 ~ 0
TB02 ~ TB00: Select Time Base 0 Time-out Period
000: 256/fTB
001: 512/fTB
010: 1024/fTB
011: 2048/fTB
100: 4096/fTB
101: 8192/fTB
110: 16384/fTB
111: 32768/fTB
 Time Base Interrupt
Rev. 1.10
147
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
EEPROM Interrupt
The EEPROM interrupt is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. An EEPROM Interrupt
request will take place when the EEPROM Interrupt request flag, DEF, is set, which occurs
when an EEPROM Write cycle ends. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt
vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and EEPROM Interrupt enable bit, DEE,
and associated Multi-function interrupt enable bit, MF0E, must first be set. When the interrupt is
enabled, the stack is not full and an EEPROM Write cycle ends, a subroutine call to the respective
EEPROM Interrupt vector, will take place. When the EEPROM Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit
will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt
request flag will be also automatically cleared. As the DEF flag will not be automatically cleared, it
has to be cleared by the application program.
LVD Interrupt
An LVD Interrupt request will take place when the LVD Interrupt request flag, LVF, is set, which
occurs when the Low Voltage Detector function detects a low power supply voltage. To allow the
program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and
Low Voltage Interrupt enable bit, LVE, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is
not full and a low voltage condition occurs, a subroutine call to the LVD Interrupt vector, will take
place. When the Low Voltage Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to
disable other interrupts, and the LVD interrupt request flag, LVF, will be also automatically cleared.
TM Interrupts
The Standard Type TM and the Periodic Type TMs each has two interrupts. All of the TM interrupts
are contained within the Multi-function Interrupts. For the Standard Type TM and the Periodic Type
TMs there are two interrupt request flags TnPF and TnAF and two enable bits TnPE and TnAE.
A TM interrupt request will take place when any of the TM request flags are set, a situation which
occurs when a TM comparator P or comparator A match situation happens.
To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable
bit, EMI, and the respective TM Interrupt enable bit, and associated Multi-function interrupt enable
bit, MFnF, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a TM comparator
match situation occurs, a subroutine call to the relevant TM Interrupt vector locations, will take
place. When the TM interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other
interrupts, however only the related MFnF flag will be automatically cleared. As the TM interrupt
request flags will not be automatically cleared, they have to be cleared by the application program.
Interrupt Wake-up Function
Each of the interrupt functions has the capability of waking up the microcontroller when in the
SLEEP or IDLE Mode. A wake-up is generated when an interrupt request flag changes from low to
high and is independent of whether the interrupt is enabled or not. Therefore, even though the device
is in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode and its system oscillator stopped, situations such as external edge
transitions on the external interrupt pins or a low power supply voltage may cause their respective
interrupt flag to be set high and consequently generate an interrupt. Care must therefore be taken if
spurious wake-up situations are to be avoided. If an interrupt wake-up function is to be disabled then
the corresponding interrupt request flag should be set high before the device enters the SLEEP or
IDLE Mode. The interrupt enable bits have no effect on the interrupt wake-up function.
Rev. 1.10
148
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programming Considerations
By disabling the relevant interrupt enable bits, a requested interrupt can be prevented from being
serviced, however, once an interrupt request flag is set, it will remain in this condition in the
interrupt register until the corresponding interrupt is serviced or until the request flag is cleared by
the application program.
Where a certain interrupt is contained within a Multi-function interrupt, then when the interrupt
service routine is executed, as only the Multi-function interrupt request flags, MF0F~MF3F, will
be automatically cleared, the individual request flag for the function needs to be cleared by the
application program.
It is recommended that programs do not use the “CALL” instruction within the interrupt service
subroutine. Interrupts often occur in an unpredictable manner or need to be serviced immediately.
If only one stack is left and the interrupt is not well controlled, the original control sequence will be
damaged once a CALL subroutine is executed in the interrupt subroutine.
Every interrupt has the capability of waking up the microcontroller when it is in SLEEP or IDLE
Mode, the wake up being generated when the interrupt request flag changes from low to high. If it is
required to prevent a certain interrupt from waking up the microcontroller then its respective request
flag should be first set high before enter SLEEP or IDLE Mode.
As only the Program Counter is pushed onto the stack, then when the interrupt is serviced, if the
contents of the accumulator, status register or other registers are altered by the interrupt service
program, their contents should be saved to the memory at the beginning of the interrupt service
routine.
To return from an interrupt subroutine, either a RET or RETI instruction may be executed. The RETI
instruction in addition to executing a return to the main program also automatically sets the EMI
bit high to allow further interrupts. The RET instruction however only executes a return to the main
program leaving the EMI bit in its present zero state and therefore disabling the execution of further
interrupts.
Rev. 1.10
149
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Low Voltage Detector – LVD
The device has a Low Voltage Detector function, also known as LVD. This enables the device to
monitor the power supply voltage, VDD, and provides a warning signal should it fall below a certain
level. This function may be especially useful in battery applications where the supply voltage will
gradually reduce as the battery ages, as it allows an early warning battery low signal to be generated.
The Low Voltage Detector also has the capability of generating an interrupt signal.
LVD Register
The Low Voltage Detector function is controlled using a single register with the name LVDC. Three
bits in this register, VLVD2~VLVD0, are used to select one of five fixed voltages below which a
low voltage condition will be detemined. A low voltage condition is indicated when the LVDO bit is
set. If the LVDO bit is low, this indicates that the VDD voltage is above the preset low voltage value.
The LVDEN bit is used to control the overall on/off function of the low voltage detector. Setting the
bit high will enable the low voltage detector. Clearing the bit to zero will switch off the internal low
voltage detector circuits. As the low voltage detector will consume a certain amount of power, it may
be desirable to switch off the circuit when not in use, an important consideration in power sensitive
battery powered applications.
LVDC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
LVDO
LVDEN
—
VLVD2
VLVD1
VLVD0
R/W
—
—
R
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 5LVDO: LVD Output Flag
0: No Low Voltage Detect
1: Low Voltage Detect
Bit 4LVDEN: Low Voltage Detector Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.10
Bit 3 Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 2~0
VLVD2 ~ VLVD0: Select LVD Voltage
000: Undefined
001: Undefined
010: Undefined
011: 2.7V
100: 3.0V
101: 3.3V
110: 3.6V
111: 4.0V
150
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
LVD Operation
The Low Voltage Detector function operates by comparing the power supply voltage, VDD, with a
pre-specified voltage level stored in the LVDC register. This has a range of between 2.7V and 4.0V.
When the power supply voltage, VDD, falls below this pre-determined value, the LVDO bit will be
set high indicating a low power supply voltage condition. The Low Voltage Detector function is
supplied by a reference voltage which will be automatically enabled. When the device is powered
down the low voltage detector will remain active if the LVDEN bit is high. After enabling the Low
Voltage Detector, a time delay tLVDS should be allowed for the circuitry to stabilise before reading the
LVDO bit. Note also that as the VDD voltage may rise and fall rather slowly, at the voltage nears that
of VLVD, there may be multiple bit LVDO transitions.
LVD Operation
The Low Voltage Detector also has its own interrupt, providing an alternative means of low voltage
detection, in addition to polling the LVDO bit. The interrupt will only be generated after a delay of
tLVD after the LVDO bit has been set high by a low voltage condition. When the device is powered
down the Low Voltage Detector will remain active if the LVDEN bit is high. In this case, the LVF
interrupt request flag will be set, causing an interrupt to be generated if VDD falls below the preset
LVD voltage. This will cause the device to wake-up from the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, however if
the Low Voltage Detector wake up function is not required then the LVF flag should be first set high
before the device enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode.
Rev. 1.10
151
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
SCOM Function for LCD
The device has the capability of driving external LCD panels. The common pins for LCD driving,
SCOM0~SCOM3, are pin shared with certain pin on the PB0, PA4, PA3 and PA5 port. The LCD
signals (COM and SEG) are generated using the application program.
LCD Operation
An external LCD panel can be driven using this device by configuring the PB0, PA4, PA3 and PA5
pins as common pins and using other output ports lines as segment pins. The LCD driver function
is controlled using the SCOMC register which in addition to controlling the overall on/off function
also controls the bias voltage setup function. This enables the LCD COM driver to generate the
necessary VDD/2 voltage levels for LCD 1/2 bias operation.
The SCOMEN bit in the SCOMC register is the overall master control for the LCD driver, however
this bit is used in conjunction with the COMnEN bits to select which Port C pins are used for LCD
driving. Note that the Port Control register does not need to first setup the pins as outputs to enable
the LCD driver operation.
LCD COM Bias Control
SCOMEN
COMnEN
Pin Function
O/P Level
0
X
I/O
0 or 1
1
0
I/O
0 or 1
1
1
SCOMn
VDD/2
Output Control
Rev. 1.10
152
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
LCD Bias Control
The LCD COM driver enables a range of selections to be provided to suit the requirement of the
LCD panel which is being used. The bias resistor choice is implemented using the ISEL1 and ISEL0
bits in the SCOMC register.
SCOMC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
ISEL1
ISEL0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SCOMEN COM3EN COM2EN COM1EN COM0EN
Bit 7
Reserved Bit
0: Correct level - bit must be reset to zero for correct operation
1: Unpredictable operation - bit must not be set high
Bit 6~5
ISEL1~ ISEL0: Select SCOM typical bias current (VDD=5V)
00: 25μA
01: 50μA
10: 100μA
11: 200μA
Bit4SCOMEN: SCOM module Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit3COM3EN: PA5 or SCOM3 selection
0: GPIO
1: SCOM3
Bit 2COM2EN: PA3 or SCOM2 selection
0: GPIO
1: SCOM2
Bit 1COM1EN: PA4 or SCOM1 selection
0: GPIO
1: SCOM1
Bit 0COM0EN: PB0 or SCOM0 selection
0: GPIO
1: SCOM0
Rev. 1.10
153
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Application Circuit
USB I/P
+
IO
50m
OUTnH OUTnL
VDD
AN
OUVP
USB O/P
IO
VDD
OCP
IO
50m
Lit�ium Batte�y x 1
OCP
10�
105
DAPWR/VREF
AN
LCD/LED
Panel
HT45F4N
IO
1k
51k
�.5V
105
TL�31B
IO/SCO�
IO
IO
VSS
USB I/P
+
Lit�ium Batte�y x �
IO
CX/DX
AX/BX
OUVP
USB O/P
AN
IO
50m
VCC
50m
IO
VDD
OCP
V5
OCP
VDD
10�
105
DAPWR/VREF
AN
LCD/LED
Panel
IO
HT45FH4N
1k
51k
�.5V
IO
IO/SCO�
RT1
50k /
�5°C
t°
105
TL�31B
IO
IO
IO
IO
VSS
Rev. 1.10
154
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Instruction Set
Introduction
Central to the successful operation of any microcontroller is its instruction set, which is a set of
program instruction codes that directs the microcontroller to perform certain operations. In the case
of Holtek microcontroller, a comprehensive and flexible set of over 60 instructions is provided to
enable programmers to implement their application with the minimum of programming overheads.
For easier understanding of the various instruction codes, they have been subdivided into several
functional groupings.
Instruction Timing
Most instructions are implemented within one instruction cycle. The exceptions to this are branch,
call, or table read instructions where two instruction cycles are required. One instruction cycle is
equal to 4 system clock cycles, therefore in the case of an 8MHz system oscillator, most instructions
would be implemented within 0.5μs and branch or call instructions would be implemented within
1μs. Although instructions which require one more cycle to implement are generally limited to
the JMP, CALL, RET, RETI and table read instructions, it is important to realize that any other
instructions which involve manipulation of the Program Counter Low register or PCL will also take
one more cycle to implement. As instructions which change the contents of the PCL will imply a
direct jump to that new address, one more cycle will be required. Examples of such instructions
would be “CLR PCL” or “MOV PCL, A”. For the case of skip instructions, it must be noted that if
the result of the comparison involves a skip operation then this will also take one more cycle, if no
skip is involved then only one cycle is required.
Moving and Transferring Data
The transfer of data within the microcontroller program is one of the most frequently used
operations. Making use of three kinds of MOV instructions, data can be transferred from registers to
the Accumulator and vice-versa as well as being able to move specific immediate data directly into
the Accumulator. One of the most important data transfer applications is to receive data from the
input ports and transfer data to the output ports.
Arithmetic Operations
The ability to perform certain arithmetic operations and data manipulation is a necessary feature of
most microcontroller applications. Within the Holtek microcontroller instruction set are a range of
add and subtract instruction mnemonics to enable the necessary arithmetic to be carried out. Care
must be taken to ensure correct handling of carry and borrow data when results exceed 255 for
addition and less than 0 for subtraction. The increment and decrement instructions INC, INCA, DEC
and DECA provide a simple means of increasing or decreasing by a value of one of the values in the
destination specified.
Rev. 1.10
155
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Logical and Rotate Operation
The standard logical operations such as AND, OR, XOR and CPL all have their own instruction
within the Holtek microcontroller instruction set. As with the case of most instructions involving
data manipulation, data must pass through the Accumulator which may involve additional
programming steps. In all logical data operations, the zero flag may be set if the result of the
operation is zero. Another form of logical data manipulation comes from the rotate instructions such
as RR, RL, RRC and RLC which provide a simple means of rotating one bit right or left. Different
rotate instructions exist depending on program requirements. Rotate instructions are useful for serial
port programming applications where data can be rotated from an internal register into the Carry
bit from where it can be examined and the necessary serial bit set high or low. Another application
which rotate data operations are used is to implement multiplication and division calculations.
Branches and Control Transfer
Program branching takes the form of either jumps to specified locations using the JMP instruction
or to a subroutine using the CALL instruction. They differ in the sense that in the case of a
subroutine call, the program must return to the instruction immediately when the subroutine has
been carried out. This is done by placing a return instruction “RET” in the subroutine which will
cause the program to jump back to the address right after the CALL instruction. In the case of a JMP
instruction, the program simply jumps to the desired location. There is no requirement to jump back
to the original jumping off point as in the case of the CALL instruction. One special and extremely
useful set of branch instructions are the conditional branches. Here a decision is first made regarding
the condition of a certain data memory or individual bits. Depending upon the conditions, the
program will continue with the next instruction or skip over it and jump to the following instruction.
These instructions are the key to decision making and branching within the program perhaps
determined by the condition of certain input switches or by the condition of internal data bits.
Bit Operations
The ability to provide single bit operations on Data Memory is an extremely flexible feature of all
Holtek microcontrollers. This feature is especially useful for output port bit programming where
individual bits or port pins can be directly set high or low using either the “SET [m].i” or “CLR [m].i”
instructions respectively. The feature removes the need for programmers to first read the 8-bit output
port, manipulate the input data to ensure that other bits are not changed and then output the port with
the correct new data. This read-modify-write process is taken care of automatically when these bit
operation instructions are used.
Table Read Operations
Data storage is normally implemented by using registers. However, when working with large
amounts of fixed data, the volume involved often makes it inconvenient to store the fixed data in
the Data Memory. To overcome this problem, Holtek microcontrollers allow an area of Program
Memory to be set as a table where data can be directly stored. A set of easy to use instructions
provides the means by which this fixed data can be referenced and retrieved from the Program
Memory.
Other Operations
In addition to the above functional instructions, a range of other instructions also exist such as
the “HALT” instruction for Power-down operations and instructions to control the operation of
the Watchdog Timer for reliable program operations under extreme electric or electromagnetic
environments. For their relevant operations, refer to the functional related sections.
Rev. 1.10
156
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Instruction Set Summary
The following table depicts a summary of the instruction set categorised according to function and
can be consulted as a basic instruction reference using the following listed conventions.
Table Conventions
x: Bits immediate data
m: Data Memory address
A: Accumulator
i: 0~7 number of bits
addr: Program memory address
Mnemonic
Description
Cycles
Flag Affected
Add Data Memory to ACC
Add ACC to Data Memory
Add immediate data to ACC
Add Data Memory to ACC with Carry
Add ACC to Data memory with Carry
Subtract immediate data from the ACC
Subtract Data Memory from ACC
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with result in Data Memory
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry, result in Data Memory
Decimal adjust ACC for Addition with result in Data Memory
1
1Note
1
1
1Note
1
1
1Note
1
1Note
1Note
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
C
1
1
1
1Note
1Note
1Note
1
1
1
1Note
1
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Increment Data Memory with result in ACC
Increment Data Memory
Decrement Data Memory with result in ACC
Decrement Data Memory
1
1Note
1
1Note
Z
Z
Z
Z
Rotate Data Memory right with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory right
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry
Rotate Data Memory left with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory left
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry
1
1Note
1
1Note
1
1Note
1
1Note
None
None
C
C
None
None
C
C
Arithmetic
ADD A,[m]
ADDM A,[m]
ADD A,x
ADC A,[m]
ADCM A,[m]
SUB A,x
SUB A,[m]
SUBM A,[m]
SBC A,[m]
SBCM A,[m]
DAA [m]
Logic Operation
AND A,[m]
OR A,[m]
XOR A,[m]
ANDM A,[m]
ORM A,[m]
XORM A,[m]
AND A,x
OR A,x
XOR A,x
CPL [m]
CPLA [m]
Logical AND Data Memory to ACC
Logical OR Data Memory to ACC
Logical XOR Data Memory to ACC
Logical AND ACC to Data Memory
Logical OR ACC to Data Memory
Logical XOR ACC to Data Memory
Logical AND immediate Data to ACC
Logical OR immediate Data to ACC
Logical XOR immediate Data to ACC
Complement Data Memory
Complement Data Memory with result in ACC
Increment & Decrement
INCA [m]
INC [m]
DECA [m]
DEC [m]
Rotate
RRA [m]
RR [m]
RRCA [m]
RRC [m]
RLA [m]
RL [m]
RLCA [m]
RLC [m]
Rev. 1.10
157
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Mnemonic
Description
Cycles
Flag Affected
Move Data Memory to ACC
Move ACC to Data Memory
Move immediate data to ACC
1
1Note
1
None
None
None
Clear bit of Data Memory
Set bit of Data Memory
1Note
1Note
None
None
Jump unconditionally
Skip if Data Memory is zero
Skip if Data Memory is zero with data movement to ACC
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is zero
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is not zero
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
Subroutine call
Return from subroutine
Return from subroutine and load immediate data to ACC
Return from interrupt
2
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
2
2
2
2
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Read table (specific page) to TBLH and Data Memory
Read table (current page) to TBLH and Data Memory
Read table (last page) to TBLH and Data Memory
2Note
2Note
2Note
None
None
None
No operation
Clear Data Memory
Set Data Memory
Clear Watchdog Timer
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
Swap nibbles of Data Memory
Swap nibbles of Data Memory with result in ACC
Enter power down mode
1
1Note
1Note
1
1
1
1Note
1
1
None
None
None
TO, PDF
TO, PDF
TO, PDF
None
None
TO, PDF
Data Move
MOV A,[m]
MOV [m],A
MOV A,x
Bit Operation
CLR [m].i
SET [m].i
Branch
JMP addr
SZ [m]
SZA [m]
SZ [m].i
SNZ [m].i
SIZ [m]
SDZ [m]
SIZA [m]
SDZA [m]
CALL addr
RET
RET A,x
RETI
Table Read
TABRD [m]
TABRDC [m]
TABRDL [m]
Miscellaneous
NOP
CLR [m]
SET [m]
CLR WDT
CLR WDT1
CLR WDT2
SWAP [m]
SWAPA [m]
HALT
Note: 1. For skip instructions, if the result of the comparison involves a skip then two cycles are required, if no
skip takes place only one cycle is required.
2. Any instruction which changes the contents of the PCL will also require 2 cycles for execution.
3. For the “CLR WDT1” and “CLR WDT2” instructions the TO and PDF flags may be affected by the
execution status. The TO and PDF flags are cleared after both “CLR WDT1” and “CLR WDT2”
instructions are consecutively executed. Otherwise the TO and PDF flags remain unchanged.
Rev. 1.10
158
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Instruction Definition
ADC A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add Data Memory to ACC with Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory, Accumulator and the carry flag are added.
The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC + [m] + C
OV, Z, AC, C
ADCM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add ACC to Data Memory with Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory, Accumulator and the carry flag are added. The result is stored in the specified Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC + [m] + C
OV, Z, AC, C
Add Data Memory to ACC
ADD A,[m]
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator are added.
The result is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
Affected flag(s)
ACC ← ACC + [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
ADD A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add immediate data to ACC
The contents of the Accumulator and the specified immediate data are added. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC + x
OV, Z, AC, C
ADDM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add ACC to Data Memory
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator are added. The result is stored in the specified Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC + [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
AND A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical AND Data Memory to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical AND operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″AND″ [m]
Z
AND A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical AND immediate data to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bit wise logical AND operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″AND″ x
Z
ANDM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical AND ACC to Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical AND
operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC ″AND″ [m]
Z
Rev. 1.10
159
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
CALL addr
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subroutine call
Unconditionally calls a subroutine at the specified address. The Program Counter then
increments by 1 to obtain the address of the next instruction which is then pushed onto the
stack. The specified address is then loaded and the program continues execution from this
new address. As this instruction requires an additional operation, it is a two cycle instruction.
Stack ← Program Counter + 1
Program Counter ← addr
None
CLR [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Clear Data Memory
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is cleared to 0.
[m] ← 00H
None
CLR [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Clear bit of Data Memory
Bit i of the specified Data Memory is cleared to 0.
[m].i ← 0
None
CLR WDT
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Clear Watchdog Timer
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared.
WDT cleared
TO ← 0
PDF ← 0
TO, PDF
CLR WDT1
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. Note that this instruction works in
conjunction with CLR WDT2 and must be executed alternately with CLR WDT2 to have
effect. Repetitively executing this instruction without alternately executing CLR WDT2 will
have no effect.
WDT cleared
TO ← 0
PDF ← 0
TO, PDF
CLR WDT2
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. Note that this instruction works in conjunction
with CLR WDT1 and must be executed alternately with CLR WDT1 to have effect.
Repetitively executing this instruction without alternately executing CLR WDT1 will have no
effect.
WDT cleared
TO ← 0
PDF ← 0
TO, PDF
CPL [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Complement Data Memory
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is logically complemented (1′s complement). Bits which
previously contained a 1 are changed to 0 and vice versa.
[m] ← [m]
Z
Rev. 1.10
160
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
CPLA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Complement Data Memory with result in ACC
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is logically complemented (1′s complement). Bits which
previously contained a 1 are changed to 0 and vice versa. The complemented result is stored in
the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC ← [m]
Z
DAA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Decimal-Adjust ACC for addition with result in Data Memory
Convert the contents of the Accumulator value to a BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) value
resulting from the previous addition of two BCD variables. If the low nibble is greater than 9
or if AC flag is set, then a value of 6 will be added to the low nibble. Otherwise the low nibble
remains unchanged. If the high nibble is greater than 9 or if the C flag is set, then a value of 6
will be added to the high nibble. Essentially, the decimal conversion is performed by adding
00H, 06H, 60H or 66H depending on the Accumulator and flag conditions. Only the C flag
may be affected by this instruction which indicates that if the original BCD sum is greater than
100, it allows multiple precision decimal addition.
[m] ← ACC + 00H or
[m] ← ACC + 06H or [m] ← ACC + 60H or
[m] ← ACC + 66H
C
DEC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Decrement Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory is decremented by 1.
[m] ← [m] − 1
Z
DECA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Decrement Data Memory with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory is decremented by 1. The result is stored in the
Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC ← [m] − 1
Z
HALT
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Enter power down mode
This instruction stops the program execution and turns off the system clock. The contents of the Data Memory and registers are retained. The WDT and prescaler are cleared. The power
down flag PDF is set and the WDT time-out flag TO is cleared.
TO ← 0
PDF ← 1
TO, PDF
INC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Increment Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory is incremented by 1.
[m] ← [m] + 1
Z
INCA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Increment Data Memory with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory is incremented by 1. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC ← [m] + 1
Z
Rev. 1.10
161
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
JMP addr
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Jump unconditionally
The contents of the Program Counter are replaced with the specified address. Program
execution then continues from this new address. As this requires the insertion of a dummy
instruction while the new address is loaded, it is a two cycle instruction.
Program Counter ← addr
None
MOV A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Move Data Memory to ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are copied to the Accumulator.
ACC ← [m]
None
MOV A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Move immediate data to ACC
The immediate data specified is loaded into the Accumulator.
ACC ← x
None
MOV [m],A
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Move ACC to Data Memory
The contents of the Accumulator are copied to the specified Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC
None
NOP
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
No operation
No operation is performed. Execution continues with the next instruction.
No operation
None
OR A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical OR Data Memory to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise
logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″OR″ [m]
Z
OR A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical OR immediate data to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″OR″ x
Z
ORM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical OR ACC to Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC ″OR″ [m]
Z
RET
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Return from subroutine
The Program Counter is restored from the stack. Program execution continues at the restored
address.
Program Counter ← Stack
None
Rev. 1.10
162
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
RET A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Return from subroutine and load immediate data to ACC
The Program Counter is restored from the stack and the Accumulator loaded with the specified immediate data. Program execution continues at the restored address.
Program Counter ← Stack
ACC ← x
None
RETI
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Return from interrupt
The Program Counter is restored from the stack and the interrupts are re-enabled by setting the
EMI bit. EMI is the master interrupt global enable bit. If an interrupt was pending when the RETI instruction is executed, the pending Interrupt routine will be processed before returning to the main program.
Program Counter ← Stack
EMI ← 1
None
RL [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated left by 1 bit with bit 7 rotated into bit 0.
[m].(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
[m].0 ← [m].7
None
RLA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left with result in ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated left by 1 bit with bit 7 rotated into bit 0.
The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain
unchanged.
ACC.(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
ACC.0 ← [m].7
None
RLC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated left by 1 bit. Bit 7
replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 0.
[m].(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
[m].0 ← C
C ← [m].7
C
RLCA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated left by 1 bit. Bit 7 replaces the
Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into the bit 0. The rotated result is stored in the
Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
ACC.0 ← C
C ← [m].7
C
RR [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated right by 1 bit with bit 0 rotated into bit 7.
[m].i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
[m].7 ← [m].0
None
Rev. 1.10
163
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
RRA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit with bit 0
rotated into bit 7. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the
Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
ACC.7 ← [m].0
None
RRC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit. Bit 0
replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 7.
[m].i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
[m].7 ← C
C ← [m].0
C
RRCA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit. Bit 0 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 7. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
ACC.7 ← C
C ← [m].0
C
SBC A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the complement of the carry flag are
subtracted from the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is
positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
ACC ← ACC − [m] − C
OV, Z, AC, C
SBCM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry and result in Data Memory
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the complement of the carry flag are subtracted from the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Data Memory. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
[m] ← ACC − [m] − C
OV, Z, AC, C
SDZ [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if decrement Data Memory is 0
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first decremented by 1. If the result is 0 the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
[m] ← [m] − 1
Skip if [m]=0
None
Rev. 1.10
164
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
SDZA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first decremented by 1. If the result is 0, the following instruction is skipped. The result is stored in the Accumulator but the specified Data Memory contents remain unchanged. As this requires the insertion of a dummy
instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0,
the program proceeds with the following instruction.
ACC ← [m] − 1
Skip if ACC=0
None
SET [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Set Data Memory
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is set to 1.
[m] ← FFH
None
SET [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Set bit of Data Memory
Bit i of the specified Data Memory is set to 1.
[m].i ← 1
None
SIZ [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if increment Data Memory is 0
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first incremented by 1. If the result is 0, the
following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program
proceeds with the following instruction.
[m] ← [m] + 1
Skip if [m]=0
None
SIZA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first incremented by 1. If the result is 0, the following instruction is skipped. The result is stored in the Accumulator but the specified
Data Memory contents remain unchanged. As this requires the insertion of a dummy
instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not
0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
ACC ← [m] + 1
Skip if ACC=0
None
SNZ [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is not 0
If bit i of the specified Data Memory is not 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this
requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Skip if [m].i ≠ 0
None
SUB A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC
The specified Data Memory is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
ACC ← ACC − [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
Rev. 1.10
165
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
SUBM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with result in Data Memory
The specified Data Memory is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Data Memory. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
[m] ← ACC − [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
SUB A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract immediate data from ACC
The immediate data specified by the code is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
ACC ← ACC − x
OV, Z, AC, C
SWAP [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Swap nibbles of Data Memory
The low-order and high-order nibbles of the specified Data Memory are interchanged.
[m].3~[m].0 ↔ [m].7~[m].4
None
SWAPA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Swap nibbles of Data Memory with result in ACC
The low-order and high-order nibbles of the specified Data Memory are interchanged. The result is stored in the Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.3~ACC.0 ← [m].7~[m].4
ACC.7~ACC.4 ← [m].3~[m].0
None
SZ [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if Data Memory is 0
If the contents of the specified Data Memory is 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Skip if [m]=0
None
SZA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if Data Memory is 0 with data movement to ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are copied to the Accumulator. If the value is zero, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
ACC ← [m]
Skip if [m]=0
None
SZ [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is 0
If bit i of the specified Data Memory is 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires
the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle
instruction. If the result is not 0, the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Skip if [m].i=0
None
Rev. 1.10
166
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
TABRD [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Read table (specific page) to TBLH and Data Memory
The low byte of the program code (specific page) addressed by the table pointer pair (TBHP and TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
[m] ← program code (low byte)
TBLH ← program code (high byte)
None
TABRDC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Read table (current page) to TBLH and Data Memory
The low byte of the program code (current page) addressed by the table pointer (TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
[m] ← program code (low byte)
TBLH ← program code (high byte)
None
TABRDL [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Read table (last page) to TBLH and Data Memory
The low byte of the program code (last page) addressed by the table pointer (TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
[m] ← program code (low byte)
TBLH ← program code (high byte)
None
XOR A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical XOR Data Memory to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″XOR″ [m]
Z
XORM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical XOR ACC to Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC ″XOR″ [m]
Z
XOR A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical XOR immediate data to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″XOR″ x
Z
Rev. 1.10
167
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Package Information
Note that the package information provided here is for consultation purposes only. As this
information may be updated at regular intervals users are reminded to consult the Holtek website for
the latest version of the package information.
Additional supplementary information with regard to packaging is listed below. Click on the relevant
section to be transferred to the relevant website page.
• Further Package Information (include Outline Dimensions, Product Tape and Reel Specifications)
• Packing Meterials Information
• Carton information
Rev. 1.10
168
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
28-pin SSOP (150 mil) Outline Dimensions
Symbol
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
—
0.236 BSC
—
B
—
0.154 BSC
—
C
0.008
—
0.012
C’
—
0.390 BSC
—
D
—
—
0.069
E
—
0.025 BSC
—
F
0.004
—
0.0098
G
0.016
—
0.050
H
0.004
—
0.010
α
0°
—
8°
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
—
6.0 BSC
—
B
—
3.9 BSC
—
C
0.20
—
0.30
C’
—
9.9 BSC
—
1.75
D
—
—
E
—
0.635 BSC
—
F
0.10
—
0.25
G
0.41
—
1.27
H
0.10
—
0.25
α
0°
—
8°
169
March 28, 2014
HT45F4N/HT45FH4N
Power Bank 8-Bit Flash MCU
Copyright© 2014 by HOLTEK SEMICONDUCTOR INC.
The information appearing in this Data Sheet is believed to be accurate at the time
of publication. However, Holtek assumes no responsibility arising from the use of
the specifications described. The applications mentioned herein are used solely
for the purpose of illustration and Holtek makes no warranty or representation that
such applications will be suitable without further modification, nor recommends
the use of its products for application that may present a risk to human life due to
malfunction or otherwise. Holtek's products are not authorized for use as critical
components in life support devices or systems. Holtek reserves the right to alter
its products without prior notification. For the most up-to-date information, please
visit our web site at http://www.holtek.com.tw.
Rev. 1.10
170
March 28, 2014